# embedding_metadata

key: chroma:document
string_value:
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is displayed.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is 
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up 
the DNS/DHCP Function".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 392 -
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2]. The FOCAS2 screen is displayed.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify a port number to be used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. The valid


key: chroma:document
string_value:
input range is 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0.
Initial setting of the PCMCIA Ethernet card
The PCMCIA Ethernet card is factory-set to the following standard setting values, for ease of connection 
with SERVO GUIDE or FANUC LADDER-III. 
IP ADDRESS : 192.168.1.1
SUBNET MASK : 255.255.255.0
ROUTER IP ADDRESS : None
PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) : 0
TIME INTERVAL : 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
TIME INTERVAL : 0
If a specified IP address is changed to a blank (space), the specified setting is reset to the standard setting 
value.
The embedded Ethernet port does not have a standard setting value.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 393 - 
7.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function 
The following shows a setting example required for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function to operate. 
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through FOCAS2/Ethernet. 
HUB
CNC 1 CNC 2 
10BASE-T or 
100BASE-TX 
PC 1
 CNC 1 CNC 2 
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101 
The Ethernet parameter screen 
is used for setting. 
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Router IP address None None 
TCP port number 8193 8193 
UDP port number 0 0 
Time interval 0 0 
 PC 1 
IP address 192.168.0.200 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the 
personal computer (Windows2000/ XP/ 
Vista) is used for setting. 
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 
Default gateway None 
CNC 1 NC IP address 192.168.0.100 
The arguments of the data window 
library function cnc_allclibhndl3 are 
used for setting. 
NC TCP port number 8193 
CNC 2 NC IP address 192.168.0.101 
NC TCP port number 8193


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 394 -
7.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function
This section describes the settings required for the FTP file transfer function to operate using the 
embedded Ethernet function.
Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time
NOTE
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, use the embedded Ethernet port.
2 The number of FTP communications to which one CNC can be connected using 
the FTP file transfer function is one.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Before communicating with the host computer using the FTP file transfer 
function, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system 
including communication with the personal computer because the personal 
computer environment may affect communication operation.
4 To operate the host computer as the FTP server, FTP server software must be 
operated on the host computer.
5 When a lot of files are registered in the host computer, the display processing of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
host file list display might become slow. In this case, divide the folder that 
registers the files.
7.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen
On the Ethernet setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FTP file transfer function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 By pressing the [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet 
port is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
port is displayed.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE
The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the 
PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
If the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key is pressed, the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set 
up. However, the card setup is carried out for maintenance and is not necessary 
usually.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 395 -
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is displayed.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is 
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up 
the DNS/DHCP Function".
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 396 -
FTP transfer screen (CONNECT1, CONNECT2, CONNECT3)
1 Press soft key [FTP TRANS]. The FTP transfer screen is displayed.
2 Page keys can be used to make settings for the three host computers for connection 
destinations 1 to 3.
 
FTP transfer screen (1st page) FTP transfer screen (2nd page)
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200")


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file transfer function. An FTP session is used, 
so that "21" is to be specified usually.
USERNAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the host computer with FTP.
(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above. (Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
Be sure to set a password.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when logging in to the host computer.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Up to 127 characters can be specified.)
If nothing is specified, the home folder specified in the host computer becomes the log-in folder. 
Operation
Select a destination.
1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT] to be displayed. Pressing this soft 
key causes soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed.
2 Depending on the host computer to be connected, press soft key [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[CONECT 3]. CONNECT 1, 2, or 3 is highlighted in the screen title field. The computer 
corresponding to the highlighted destination is selected as the target computer to be connected.
When CONNECT1 is selected


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 397 -
7.2.2.2 Related parameters
The parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are described below.
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 9 : Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 PCH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Data type] Bit
#1 PCH When communication based on the FTP file transfer function starts, an FTP server 
presence check based on PING is:
0: Made
1: Not made
NOTE
Usually, set this parameter to 0 (to make a check).
If this parameter is set to 1 (not to make an FTP server presence 
check based on PING), several tens of seconds may be required
until an error is recognized when no FTP server is present on the 
network.
Mainly for security, a personal computer may be set to ignore the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PING command. When communicating with such a personal 
computer, set this parameter to 1 (not to make an FTP server 
presence check based on PING).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14883 PSV
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#7 PSV FTP client of FTP file transfer function:
0: Operates as the active mode.
1: Operates as the passive mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 398 - 
7.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function 
The following shows a setting example required for the FTP file transfer function to operate. 
(The OS used on the PC in the example is Windows 10.) 
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through the FTP file transfer function. 
• On Personal Computer 1, the FTP server function operates.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file transfer function. 
HUB
CNC 1 CNC 2 
10BASE-T or 
100BASE-TX 
PC 1
 CNC 1 CNC 2 
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101 
The Ethernet parameter screen 
is used for setting. 
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 
Router IP address None None 
Connection host 1 Port 
number 
21 21 
IP address 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200 
User name user user 
Password user user 
Login DIR None None


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Login DIR None None 
NC parameter No. 20 9 9 The parameter screen is used 
for setting. 
 PC 1 
IP address 192.168.0.200 
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 
Default gateway None 
User name user 
Password user 
Login DIR Default 
"Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) 
Properties" of the personal computer 
(Windows 10) is used for setting. 
"Accounts" of the personal computer 
(Windows 10) is used for setting. 
"Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager" 
of the personal computer (Windows 10) is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 399 -
7.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function
The DNS/DHCP function is set up by using the COMMON screen (DETAIL) and NC parameters.
7.2.3.1 Setting up DNS
This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DNS.
Procedure
1 Enable the DNS client function, with reference to "Related Parameters," which will be seen later.
Also this function can be enabled by setting “1” to the DNS CLIENT in the COMMON screen 
(DETAIL)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(DETAIL)
2 Set up the DNS server of the host computer.
3 Connect the host computer on which the DNS server is working (hereafter referred to as a DNS 
server), reboot the CNC, then press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [COMMON] in that order. The COMMON screen (DETAIL) 
appears. 
5 Enter the IP address of the DNS server in the corresponding DNS IP address field.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call a desired COMMON


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen (DETAIL). Specify a DNS IP address.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Setting items
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.
The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP addresses 1 and 2 in that order. 
DNS CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#5(DNS) related to the DNS client function is 
displayed, and the setting is also possible. See "Related Parameters", which will be 
seen later.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 400 -
7.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP
This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DHCP.
Procedure
1 Enable the DHCP client function, with reference to "Related Parameters," which will be seen later.
Also this function can be enabled by setting “1” to the DHCP CLIENT in the COMMON screen 
(BASIC)
2 Set up the DHCP server of the host computer.
3 Connect the host computer on which the DHCP server is working (hereafter referred to as a DHCP


key: chroma:document
string_value:
server), reboot the CNC, then press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [COMMON] in that order. The COMMON screen appears. 
5 If the DHCP client function of the CNC has been enabled and if the DHCP server is connected 
successfully, the DHCP server automatically specifies the following items. 
- IP ADDRESS
- SUBNET MASK
- ROUTER IP ADDRESS
- DNS IP ADDRESS
- DOMAIN
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed in each field.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 If the DNS client function has also been enabled and if the DHCP server and the DNS server work 
together (if the DNS server supports dynamic DNS), enter a host name.
COMMON screen (BASIC and DETAIL)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call desired Ethernet common 
setting screens (BASIC and DETAIL).
If the DHCP server is connected successfully and if the setting data can be obtained, the screens are 
displayed as shown below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 401 -
If the host name is not specified, the CNC automatically assigns a host name in the 
"NC-<MAC-address>" format. 
Example of automatically assigned host name
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, the screens are displayed as shown below.
 
When the DHCP server cannot be connected
Check items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS If the DHCP server is connected successfully, the items obtained from the DHCP 
server are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
server are displayed. 
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed.
SUBNET MASK
ROUTER IP ADDRESS
DNS IP ADDRESS 1,2
DOMAIN
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter the host name of the CNC.
If a DHCP server and a DNS server work together, the DHCP server notifies the 
DNS server of this host name.
If the host name is left blank, a host name is automatically assigned in the 
"NC-<MAC-address>" format.
Example of automatically assigned host name:
NC-080019000001


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NC-080019000001
DNS CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#5(DNS) related to the DNS client function is 
displayed, and the setting is also possible. See "Related Parameters", which will be 
seen later.
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS MAC address of embedded Ethernet


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 402 -
7.2.3.3 Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 DHC DNS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 DNS With the embedded Ethernet port, the DNS function is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
This value is also displayed to the DNS CLIENT in the COMMON screen (DETAIL), and 
the setting is also possible.
#6 DHC With the embedded Ethernet port, the DHCP function is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
This value is also displayed to the DHCP CLIENT in the COMMON screen (BASIC), and 
the setting is also possible.
NOTE
Re-setting this parameter requires turning the power off and on again 
or restarting the embedded Ethernet interface.
7.2.4 Setting of the CNC Screen Display Function
CNC Screen Display function is a software that allows performing display and operation similar to a 
CNC on the Windows PC. Refer to “CNC Screen Display Function OPERATOR’S MANUAL”


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(B-63164EN) for the method of use.
NOTE
1 The screen update interval of CNC Screen Display function is slower than that of 
a CNC-dedicated display unit. Therefore, use this function as an auxiliary display 
unit.
2 When high-load machining such as high-speed and high-precision machining is
performed or the software options that require the CPU power are specified, the 
screen update interval might be slower. Even if a higher-performance personal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
computer is used, the screen update interval is not improved.
Therefore, the CNC Screen Display function on Embedded Ethernet might not 
show the full performance according to the system configuration of the machine.
3 On Embedded Ethernet, when other network functions (FOCAS2/Ethernet 
function etc.) are used simultaneously with CNC Screen Display function, it 
affects the screen update interval. Therefore, do not use other network functions


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 403 -
7.2.4.1 Operation on the Setting screen
This section describes the setting screen for operating the CNC Screen Display function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [EMBED PORT] appears. (When there is not this soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2], and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
COMMON screen (BASIC)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is 
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up 
the DNS/DHCP Function".
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 404 -
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the CNC screen Display function
(FOCAS2/Ethernet function), within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0.
7.2.5 Setting of the Machine Remote Diagnosis package


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Machine Remote Diagnosis package is a tool designed for the machine tool builder to provide remote 
support of machines easily. Machine Remote Diagnosis function works on Embedded Ethernet or Fast 
Ethernet board in order to communicate with Machine Remote Diagnosis package.
Refer to “Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL” (B-63734EN) for the method 
of use.
NOTE
Refer to the notes of “Setting of the CNC Screen Display function” when using


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC Screen Display function for MRDP (Machine Remote Diagnosis 
Package).The notes are applied to this function, too.
7.2.5.1 Related parameters
When using Machine Remote Diagnosis package on Embedded Ethernet, the following parameters must 
be set.
0024 Setting of communication with the PMC ladder development tool
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 10: The high-speed interface (Ethernet) is used for PMC online editing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 405 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8706 MRD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#6 MRD Machine Remote Diagnosis function is used:
0: On Embedded Ethernet.
1: On Fast Ethernet board.
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 PCH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Data type] Bit
#1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine 
remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
NOTE
When connecting with the host computer (machine remote 
diagnosis accepting server) on Intranet, set 0.
When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by 
setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
recognized due to no server on the network.
When connecting with the host computer (machine remote 
diagnosis accepting server) via Internet, set 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14882 ERD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
Re-setting this parameter requires turning the power off and on
again or restarting the embedded Ethernet interface.
#0 ERD On Embedded Ethernet, Machine Remote Diagnosis is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 406 -
7.2.5.2 Operation on the Setting screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [EMBED PORT] appears. (When there is not this soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [REMOTE DIAG] and then enter parameters for the 
items that appear.
NOTE
1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
2 If the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key is pressed, the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set 
up. However, the card setup is carried out for maintenance and is not 
necessary usually.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is 
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up 
the DNS/DHCP Function".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 407 -
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the machine remote diagnosis functions


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(FOCAS2/Ethernet functions), within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 408 -
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON)
Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON).
Machine remote diagnosis screen (COMMON)
Setting items
Item Description
MTB ID This information is required by the machine remote diagnosis package to confirm that 
the diagnosis request is issued from a machine manufactured by the machine tool 
builder. The MTB identification information on the diagnosis accepting server of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
machine remote diagnosis package can be set to accept diagnosis requests only from 
the machines manufactured by the machine tool builder.
(Example of specification format: "FANUC")
MACHINE ID Information required by the machine remote diagnosis package to identify the machine 
under diagnosis
(Example of specification format: "217xxx-1011xxxxx")


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 409 -
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (INQUIRY1, INQUIRY2, INQUIRY3)
Press soft key [RMTDIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen.
By using page keys , the three host computers at inquiry destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.
 
(When the DNS function is disabled) (When the DNS function is enabled)
Machine Remote Diagnosis screens (INQUIRY1)
Setting item
Item Description


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting 
server) when the DNS function is disabled.
(Example of specification format: "200.201.202.203")
Specify the host name of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting 
server) when the DNS function is enabled. (You can specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "RMTDIAG.FANUC.CO.JP")


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number. Usually, specify "8194" because the machine remote diagnosis 
functions are used.
INQUIRY NAME Specify information for identifying the host computer (machine remote diagnosis 
accepting server). (You can specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "FANUC")


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 410 -
7.2.5.3 Controlling Machine Remote Diagnosis function from PMC
You can use signals from the PMC to control the start and forced termination of the machine remote 
diagnosis functions and post the status of the machine remote diagnosis functions and error numbers to 
the PMC ladder.
Signals
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0141 DIAREQ DIASTP INQU2 INQU1 INQU0
DIAREQ <G0141.5>
[Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the start of machine remote diagnosis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests the start of machine remote diagnosis to the 
inquiry destination according to the signals indicating the number of the inquiry 
destination (INQU0<G0141.0> to INQU2<G0141.2>). When the acceptance completion 
signal (RMTEND<F0083.6>) or acceptance reject signal (RMTCAN<F0083.7>) is set to 
"1", this signal is set to "0".
DIASTP <G0141.4>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DIASTP <G0141.4>
[Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the forced termination of machine remote diagnosis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests forced termination to the machine remote 
diagnosis accepting server. When the completion signal for machine remote signal cancel 
acceptance (RMTCLS<F0082.3>) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0".
INQU2 <G0141.2>
INQU1 <G0141.1>
INQU0 <G0141.0>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
INQU0 <G0141.0>
[Name] Inquiry number select signals
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Inquiry destination for which to start machine remote diagnosis
[Operation] Select an item from the table below as an inquiry destination for which to start machine 
remote signal.
INQU2 INQU1 INQU0 Status
0 0 0 No selection
0 0 1 Inquiry destination 1
0 1 0 Inquiry destination 2
0 1 1 Inquiry destination 3
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0082 RMTCLS
RMTCLS <F0082.3>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
F0082 RMTCLS
RMTCLS <F0082.3>
[Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a request to cancel machine remote diagnosis has been accepted.
[Output condition] When machine remote diagnosis is canceled after the signal to request machine remote 
diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP<G0141.4>) is set to "1", this signal is set to "1". When 
the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP<G0141.4>) is set


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 411 -
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0083 RMTCAN RMTEND DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0
RMTCAN <F0083.7>
[Name] Reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been rejected.
[Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ<G0141.5>) is set to "1",


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a request to start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis 
accepting server. When the server rejects the request, this signal is set to "1". When the 
signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ<G0141.5>) is set to "0", this signal 
is set to "0".
RMTEND <F0083.6>
[Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been accepted by the machine


key: chroma:document
string_value:
remote diagnosis accepting server.
[Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ<G0141.5>) is set to "1", 
a request to start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis 
accepting server. When the server accepts the request, this signal is set to "1". When the 
signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ<G0141.5>) is set to "0", this signal 
is set to "0".
DIAST5 <F0083.5>
DIAST4 <F0083.4>
DIAST3 <F0083.3>
DIAST2 <F0083.2>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DIAST2 <F0083.2>
DIAST1 <F0083.1>
DIAST0 <F0083.0>
[Name] Notification signals for the machine remote diagnosis status
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Report the status of machine remote diagnosis.
[Output condition] The status of machine remote diagnosis is reported as listed in the following table.
DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0 Description
0 0 0 0 0 0 No status
0 0 0 0 0 1 OPEN
0 0 0 0 1 0 OPENING
0 0 0 0 1 1 ACCEPTED
0 0 0 1 0 0 REFUSED
0 0 0 1 0 1 DIAGNOSING


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0 0 0 1 0 1 DIAGNOSING
0 0 0 1 1 0 DIAGNOSING
0 0 0 1 1 1 CLOSE
0 0 1 0 0 0 FORCE CLOSING
0 0 1 0 0 1 ERROR
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0088 DIAER7 DIAER6 DIAER5 DIAER4 DIAER3 DIAER2 DIAER1 DIAER0
DIAER7 <F0088.7>
DIAER6 <F0088.6>
DIAER5 <F0088.5>
DIAER4 <F0088.4>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 412 -
DIAER3 <F0088.3>
DIAER2 <F0088.2>
DIAER1 <F0088.1>
DIAER0 <F0088.0>
[Name] Notification signals for a machine remote diagnosis error number
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Report an error number of machine remote diagnosis.
[Output condition] These signals indicate an error number of machine remote diagnosis. The error number is 
0 to 255 in binary format.
Signal Timing Charts
When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted


key: chroma:document
string_value:
INQU0 (G0141.0)
INQU1 (G0141.1)
INQU2 (G0141.2)
DIAREQ (G0141.5)
RMTEND (F0083.6)
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
The start of machine remote 
diagnosis is accepted.
<5>
<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry 
destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination 
number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected


key: chroma:document
string_value:
by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.
<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1".
<3> When the machine remote diagnosis package accepts the request to start diagnosis, the completion 
signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1".
<4> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1", the 
signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the completion signal 
for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "0".
When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected
INQU0 (G0141.0)
INQU1 (G0141.1)
INQU2 (G0141.2)
DIAREQ (G0141.5)
RMTCAN (F0083.7)
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
The start of machine remote 
diagnosis is rejected.
<5>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 413 -
<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry 
destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination 
number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected 
by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.
<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<3> When the machine remote diagnosis package rejects the request to start diagnosis, the reject signal 
for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1".
<4> When the reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1", the signal 
to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0".
<5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the reject signal for 
machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "0".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated
DIASTP (G0141.4)
RMTCLS (F0082.3) <1>
<2>
<3>
Machine remote diagnosis is 
forcibly terminated.
<1> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", the 
completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1".
<2> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
"1", the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0".
<3> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", the 
completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "0" and the 
machine remote diagnosis functions are forcibly terminated.
7.2.5.4 Operating Machine Remote Diagnosis screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [REMOTE DIAG] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the machine remote diagnosis screen.
Machine Remote Diagnosis screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 414 -
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display available soft keys.
Soft keys of Machine Remote Diagnosis screen
Display items
INQUIRY NUMBER
Displays the inquiry number indicating the machine remote diagnosis accepting server: "INQUIRY1," 
"INQUIRY2," or "INQUIRY3."
INQUIRY
Displays information for identifying the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
RMT DIAG STATUS
Displays the status of machine remote diagnosis.
RMT DIAG TIME


key: chroma:document
string_value:
RMT DIAG TIME
Displays the time until the machine remote diagnosis status changes from "OPEN" to "CLOSE," "FORCE 
CLOSING," or "ERROR."
At each start of diagnosis, the time is accumulated from "00:00:00."
RECEIPT NUMBER
Displays the receipt number issued by the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
ERROR NUMBER
Displays the number of an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis functions.
AVAILABLE DEVICE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
AVAILABLE DEVICE
Displays the type of communication device for which the machine remote diagnosis functions can 
operate.
ERROR MESSAGE
Displays the message indicating an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis 
functions.
Operation list
DIAG OPEN
Starts machine remote diagnosis.
DIAG CLOSE
Forcibly terminates machine remote diagnosis.
INQUIRY1
Selects inquiry destination 1.
INQUIRY2
Selects inquiry destination 2.
INQUIRY3
Selects inquiry destination 3.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 415 -
Selecting an Inquiry Destination
Select an inquiry destination among inquiry destinations 1 to 3.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [INQUIRY1] to select inquiry destination 1.
3 Similarly, press soft key [INQUIRY2] to select inquiry destination 2 and soft key [INQUIRY3] to 
select inquiry destination 3.
Starting Diagnosis
Start diagnosis.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [DIAG OPEN] to send the start request to the machine remote diagnosis
3 When the machine remote diagnosis accepts the start request, the diagnosis begins.
Diagnosis status
Status Description
--- No operation
OPEN Soft key [DIAG OPEN] was pressed.
OPENING An attempt is being made to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting 
server.
ACCEPTED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server accepted diagnosis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
REFUSED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server rejected diagnosis.
DIAGNOSING This message flashes in synchronization with data flowing on the 
communication line.
FORCE CLOSING Soft key [DIAG CLOSE] was pressed. After the completion of forced 
termination processing, "CLOSE" is indicated in the RMT DIAG STATUS field.
CLOSE The machine remote diagnosis accepting server terminated diagnosis.
ERROR An error occurred on the communication line.
Error numbers and error messages


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken
1 Diagnosis is busy Soft key [DIAG OPEN] was pressed during diagnosis.
2 Router isn’t alive
The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be 
off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power 
to the router is on.
3 Receipt Server isn’t 
alive
The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be 
invalid or the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may not be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operating. Check whether the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis 
accepting server is valid and whether the machine remote diagnosis accepting 
server is operating.
4 System error A system error occurred.
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
5 Invalid Inquiry 
number.
A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the inquiry destination.
Check whether the correct inquiry destination is set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Invalid IP Address Set the IP address according to the IP address specification format.
7 Invalid PORT number A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the port number.
Check whether the correct port number is set.
8 Invalid Router IP 
Address
Set the IP address of the router according to the IP address specification 
format.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 416 -
Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken
9 Socket error
A communication error occurred due to a cause as listed below.
Check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
→ The network quality degraded, data could not be received from the 
personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical 
communication path was disconnected.
→ The software component on the personal computer with which to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
communicate forcibly disconnected the logical communication path.
→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected.
11 Invalid Request An internal error related to machine remote diagnosis occurred in the CNC.
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
12 Invalid Packet An unrecognizable packet was received.
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
13 Diagnosis was already 
stopped
Soft key [DIGA CLOSE] was pressed not during diagnosis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
17 Receive error An attempt to receive data failed.
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
19 HeartBeat timeout Communication with the machine remote diagnosis accepting server stopped.
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
20 HeartBeat error
An attempt was failed to send a heartbeat packet for machine remote 
diagnosis.
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
22 DNS error


key: chroma:document
string_value:
22 DNS error
An attempt was failed to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting 
server using the DNS function.
The IP address of the DNS server may be invalid or the power to the DNS 
server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is valid 
and whether the power to the DNS server is on.
Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis
Forcibly terminate diagnosis.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [DIAG CLOSE] to forcibly terminate diagnosis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 417 - 
7.2.6 Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function 
This subsection describes the setting required to operate the unsolicited messaging function with the 
embedded Ethernet function. 
7.2.6.1 Overview 
This subsection provides an overview of the unsolicited messaging function and describes the execution 
procedure.
Overview of the unsolicited messaging function 
An overview of the unsolicited messaging function is provided below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
With the unsolicited messaging function, the CNC transmits messages (CNC/PMC data) in an unsolicited 
manner to application software on the personal computer according to a command from an NC program 
or ladder program. By using this function, the need for application processing on the personal computer to 
periodically inquire about the state of the CNC can be eliminated. 
When the conventional function is used 
Application checks for 
CNC/PMC data changes. 
Application software 
Response


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Response 
Inquiry 
When the unsolicited messaging function is used 
NC program or ladder 
program checks for 
CNC/PMC data 
changes. 
アプリケーションソフトウェア
Application receives 
notification from CNC. 
Application software 
Notification 
NC program or ladder 
program 
NOTE 
 The unsolicited messaging function is a part of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 418 -
Unsolicited messaging function execution procedure
The execution procedure for the unsolicited messaging function is described below.
1 Preparation on the personal compute
Create an application using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and install
the unsolicited message server on a personal computer. For the method of creating an application


key: chroma:document
string_value:
using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and the method of installing the 
unsolicited message server, refer to Chapter 5, "Unsolicited Messaging Function", in the “Data 
Window Library Specifications" supplied with the FOCAS1/2 library.
2 Preparation on the CNC
Create an NC program or ladder program for controlling unsolicited messaging.
For the method of creating an NC program or ladder program, see Subsection, "Execution methods".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Setting of the communication parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
To use the unsolicited messaging function, the following communication parameter settings are 
needed:
(1) Setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function
(2) Setting of the parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
For (2), a choice can be made from two modes of setting: CNC mode for setting on the CNC screen
and the PC mode for setting on the personal computer.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For the setting method of (1) and (2), see Subsection, "Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function" 
through Subsection, "Setting on the personal computer".
4 Starting the NC program or ladder program
Start the NC program or ladder program created in step 2, "Preparation on the CNC". At this time, 
no unsolicited message is transmitted to the personal computer until step 5, "Starting the unsolicited 
messaging function", is executed.
5 Starting the unsolicited messaging function


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart on the personal computer. This execution places the 
CNC in the state (named "Ready") where a transmission request from the NC program or ladder
program is awaited. Each time a transmission request is made from the NC program or ladder
program, an unsolicited message is automatically transmitted to the personal computer.
6 Ending the unsolicited messaging function
To end unsolicited message transmission, execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop on the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
personal computer. This execution places the CNC in the state (named "Not Ready") where no 
unsolicited message is transmitted even when a request for transmission is made from the NC
program or ladder program.
7.2.6.2 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function
This subsection describes the setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for operating the unsolicited 
messaging function.
Procedure
1 Enable the unsolicited messaging function according to "Related parameters" described later.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Start the CNC again then press function key .
3 Soft key [EMBED PORT] is displayed. (Press the continuous menu key until the soft key is 
displayed.)
4 Press soft key [EMBED PORT]. The Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port is 
displayed.
5 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] then make settings on each screen.
6 Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG]. The Unsolicited Message screen is displayed. (Press the continuous


key: chroma:document
string_value:
menu key until the soft key [UNSOLI MSG] is displayed.) For details of the Unsolicited Message
screen, see Subsections starting with Subsection, "Mode selection".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 419 -
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is displayed.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
NOTE
Set page 2 (DETAIL screen) of the COMMON screen when using the 
DNS/DHCP function. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up the DNS/DHCP 
Function".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 420 -
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
When using the DNS client function, press soft key [COMMON] then press page key . The 
COMMON screen (DETAIL) is displayed. Set the DNS IP address setting items.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Setting items
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.
The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP addresses 1 and 2 in that 
order.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
order. 
DNS CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#5(DNS) related to the DNS client function is 
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up 
the DNS/DHCP Function".
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2]. The FOCAS2 screen is displayed.
FOCAS2 screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 421 -
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify a port number to be used with the unsolicited messaging function
(FOCAS2/Ethernet function). The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0.
7.2.6.3 Mode selection
This subsection describes the selection of a mode for setting the unsolicited messaging function.
Unsolicited Message screen (BASIC)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG]. The Unsolicited Message screen (BASIC) is displayed.
Unsolicited Message screen 1 (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
MODE Select a mode for setting the unsolicited messaging function.
For the method of selection, see "Operation" described later.
• When "CNC MODE" is selected
This mode enables setting on the CNC screen.
In this case, setting on the personal computer is disabled.
For details, see Subsection, "Setting on the CNC screen".
• When "PC MODE" is selected


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• When "PC MODE" is selected
This mode enables setting on the personal computer.
In this case, setting on the CNC screen is disabled.
For details, see Subsection, "Setting on the personal computer".
NOTE
1 The mode is set to "PC MODE" at the time of initial use.
2 The mode can be switched only in the "Not Ready" state. For the "Not Ready" 
state, see "Display items" provided later. 
3 If the mode is switched from "CNC MODE" to "PC MODE", all parameters set on 
the CNC screen are cleared.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 422 -
Operation
The mode can be switched as described below.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft key [MODE] is displayed.
2 Press soft key [MODE]. Soft keys [CNC MODE] and [PC MODE] are displayed.
Display items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Displays the IP address of the personal computer currently connected.
(Example of display format: "192.168.0.1")
STATUS Displays the current state.
The following five states are available:
<1> Not Ready


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<1> Not Ready
State where data is not transmitted even when a request for data transmission is 
made from an NC program or ladder program
<2> Ready
State where data is transmitted when a request for data transmission is made from 
an NC program or ladder program
<3> Sending...
State present from the acceptance of a request for data transmission from an NC
program or ladder program until data transmission is completed
<4> Receiving...


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<4> Receiving...
State present from completion of data transmission until response data is received
<5> Completed
State present from reception of response data until response data processing is 
completed
[Supplement]
• Data transmission
Means unsolicited message transmission (CNC→PC).
• Response data
Means a response to an unsolicited message (PC→CNC).
AVAILABLE DEVICE Device where embedded Ethernet is currently enabled.
The embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 To switch the state from "Not Ready" to "Ready”, the FOCAS2 function
cnc_unsolicstart needs to be executed on the personal computer.
2 To switch the state from other than "Not Ready" to “Not Ready”, the FOCAS2 
function cnc_unsolicstop needs to be executed on the personal computer.
3 For the timing charts of the states, see Subsection, "Execution methods".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 423 -
7.2.6.4 Setting on the CNC screen
This subsection describes the method of setting on the Unsolicited Message screen.
NOTE
1 To enable the settings on the CNC screen and perform unsolicited messaging, 
the procedure below needs to be used.
(1) Set all setting items on the Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT).
(2) Press soft key [(OPRT)] then press soft key [APPLY].
(3) Start unsolicited messaging (execute the FOCAS2 function


key: chroma:document
string_value:
cnc_unsolicstart) on the personal computer.
2 Setting of the setting items on the Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT) and 
execution of the soft keys ([(OPRT)] then [APPLY]) are possible only in the "Not 
Ready" state. For the "Not Ready" state, see "Display items" in Subsection, 
"Mode selection".
3 On the setting screen on the unavailable device side, the setting items can be 
set. However, execution of the soft keys ([(OPRT)] then [APPLY]) is possible on 
the available device side only.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT)
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] then open page 2 and page 3 with page keys . The Unsolicited 
Message screen (CONNECT) is displayed.
 
Unsolicited Message screen 2 (CONNECT) Unsolicited Message screen 3 (CONNECT)
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME (IP ADDRESS) When the DNS client function is disabled, specify the IP address of the 
communication destination personal computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1")


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the DNS client function is enabled, specify the host name of the 
communication destination personal computer. (Up to 63 characters can be 
specified.)
(Example of specification format: "UNSOLI-SRV.FACTORY")


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 424 -
Item Description
PORT NUMBER Specify the TCP port number and UDP port number of the communication
destination personal computer.
Usually, specify "8196".
The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
RETRY COUNT Specify the number of retries to be made when there is no response to data 
transmitted by the communication function.
The valid input range is 0 to 32767.
TIMEOUT Specify a time-out period (in sec) from the transmission of data by the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
communication function until a response is made to the transmitted data.
The valid input range is 1 to 32767.
ALIVE TIME Specify the time interval (in sec) of the alive signal to be transmitted while the 
communication function is operating normally.
Specify a value not greater than the value of TIMEOUT.
The valid input range is 1 to 32767.
CONTROL PARAMETER 
TYPE
Specify a type of control parameter. When this parameter is set to 0, the control
parameter is invalid.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter is invalid.
• When set to 1: PMC address (response notification method)
• When set to 2: PMC address (simplified method)
• When set to 3: Custom macro variable (simplified method)
• When set to 4: Volatile RTM variable (simplified method)
(Note) The RTM variable is a real-time custom macro variable.
CONTROL PARAMETER Specify a control parameter for executing data transmission.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 1
Specify a PMC address for control.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A PMC address in the R area or E area may be specified.
Two bytes starting at a specified address are allocated in the area.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 2
Specify a PMC address for control. 
A PMC address in the R area or E area may be specified.
Only a specified address (one byte) is allocated in the area.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 3
Specify a custom macro variable number for control.
Only a volatile common variable may be specified as a custom macro variable.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Only the variable with a specified variable number is allocated in the area.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 4
Specify a RTM variable number for control.
Only a volatile RTM variable may be specified as a RTM variable.
Only the variable with a specified variable number is allocated in the area.
TRANSMISSION NUMBER Specify the number of data items to be transmitted.
The valid input range is 1 to 3.
TRANSMISSION 
PARAMETER
(NO.1 to 3)
Specify each parameter for transmission data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
TYPE Specify a transmission data type. When this parameter is set to 0, the 
transmission parameter is invalid.
• When set to 1 or 2: PMC address
• When set to 3: Custom macro variable
• When set to 4: Volatile RTM variable
• When set to 5: Nonvolatile RTM variable
PMC ADDRESS or 
MACRO NO.
Specify the start of a transmission data area
When TYPE is set to 1 or 2
Specify a PMC address for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 3
Specify a custom macro variable number for transmission.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 425 -
Item Description
SIZE or NUMBER Specify the size of a transmission data area or the number of variables.
The maximum specifiable number of bytes is as follows:
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 1: 2890 bytes
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 2: 2874 bytes in total
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 3: 2858 bytes in total
When using macro variables (custom macro variables or RTM variables), use a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
conversion rate of one variable for eight bytes.
When TYPE is set to 1 or 2
Specify a PMC area size (bytes) for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 3
Specify the number of custom macro variables for transmission.
When a macro variable number of 1000 or greater (system variable) is used, 
this parameter can be set to 1 only.
When TYPE is set to 4 or 5
Specify the number of RTM variables for transmission.
CAUTION
1 Immediately after the power is turned on, all R area and E area as volatile


key: chroma:document
string_value:
memory in the PMC area are 0.
2 The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it 
can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option.
When the area is used as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are 
retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid 
not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time.
NOTE
1 Two methods are available for PMC address specification in CONTROL


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PARAMETER TYPE: response notification method and simplified method. For 
details of the methods, see Subsection, "Execution methods".
2 The valid setting range of PMC addresses depends on the usable PMC memory
type. For details, refer to "PMC Programming Manual (B-64513EN)".
3 The valid setting ranges of custom macro variable numbers and RTM variable
numbers depend on the selected options. For details, refer to "Operator’s 
Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64694EN)".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Ensure that the setting of TRANSMISSION NUMBER matches the settings of 
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO. 1 to NO. 3). If TRANSMISSION NUMBER
is set to 3, and an invalid value is specified in any of TRANSMISSION
PARAMETER NO. 1 to NO. 3, for example, execution of soft key [APPLY] 
results in an error.
Setting PMC address
To setting a PMC address for control or a PMC address for transmission, specify it as follows:
Input format)
<Path number>:<PMC address>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<Path number>:<PMC address>
For example, for R0500 on the second path of the PMC, input "2:R500". 
If <Path number> is omitted (R500), the first path is assumed (1:R0500). 
If the <:> key is not available, it can be substituted with the </> key or the <EOB> key. ":" is optional. 
To clear "<Path number>:<PMC address>" previously set, input " " (blank). ("---" will be displayed). In 
this case, it is assumed that no PMC area is used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 426 -
Setting macro variable
To setting a macro variable for control or a macro variable for transmission, specify it as follows:
Input format)
<Path number>:<Variable No>
For example, for No.100 on the second path of the Macro, input "2:100". 
If <Path number> is omitted (100), the first path is assumed (1:100). 
If the <:> key is not available, it can be substituted with the </> key or the <EOB> key. ":" is optional.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To clear "<Path number>:<Variable No>" previously set, input " " (blank). ("---" will be displayed). In 
this case, it is assumed that no macro variable is used.
Operation
The settings of all setting items on the Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT) can be made effective as 
follows:
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft key [APPLY] is displayed.
2 Press soft key [APPLY].
7.2.6.5 Setting on the personal computer


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For setting on the personal computer, create and set an application by using the following FOCAS2 
functions:
• cnc_wrunsolicprm2 Parameter setting 2 for unsolicited messaging
• cnc_unsolicstart Start of unsolicited messaging
For details, refer to Chapter 5, "Unsolicited Messaging Function", in the “Data Window Library 
Specifications" supplied with the FOCAS1/2 library.
NOTE
1 To start unsolicited messaging, the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 needs


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to be executed first then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart needs to be 
executed.
2 The FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 can be executed only in the "Not 
Ready" state. For details of the state, see "Display items" in Subsection, "Mode 
selection".
3 When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 is executed, the Unsolicited 
Message screen (CONNECT) displays the settings made on the personal 
computer.
7.2.6.6 Execution methods


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7.2.6.6 Execution methods
How to execute the unsolicited messaging function is described below.
To execute the unsolicited messaging function, three methods are available:
• Using a PMC address for control based on the response notification method in a ladder program
• Using a PMC address for control based on the simplified method in a ladder program
• Using a macro variable for control based on the simplified method in an NC program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 427 -
NOTE
1 When a ladder program is used, the response notification method and the 
simplified method are available. A major difference is that the response 
notification method sends RES_CODE to the ladder program in response to data
transmission but the simplified method does not send a response.
To utilize a ladder program based on logic used with the Series 16i, for example, 
use the response notification method. When RES_CODE is unnecessary or a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
new ladder program is created, the simplified method can be used.
2 RES_CODE is recorded on the Ethernet log screen when a value other than 
0x00 and 0x01 is detected.
3 For details of RES_CODE, refer to Chapter 5, "Unsolicited Messaging Function", in the 
“Data Window Library Specifications" supplied with the FOCAS1/2 library.
When a PMC address for control is used (response notification method)
A description of using a PMC address for control in a ladder program according to the response


key: chroma:document
string_value:
notification method is provided below.
NOTE
A combination of a PMC address for control and a macro variable for 
transmission is also usable. In this case, note that the read timing of the value of 
a macro variable to be transmitted cannot be identified when viewed from the 
ladder program.
In the description below, a PMC address is used for both of control and 
transmission.
Explanation of PMC address signals for control


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A detailed description of PMC address signals for control used to execute the unsolicited messaging 
function is provided below. A PMC address area for control consists of 2 bytes.
The description below assumes that Rxxxx (with no PMC path number specified) is used as a PMC
address for control.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx.7>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message at a PMC address for transmission, the ladder
program sets this signal to 1. The message is then transmitted to the personal computer.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx+1 RES COM RES_CODE
RES <Rxxxx+1.7>
[Name] Message response reception signal
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts the reception of a response to an unsolicited message.
[Output condition] Upon reception of a message by the personal computer, a response to the message is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
transmitted to the CNC (communication function). When the CNC (communication
function) receives the response, this signal is set to 1. When this signal is set to 1, the 
ladder program reads RES_CODE then clears REQ to 0. Next, the CNC (communication
function) clears RES_CODE to 0 then sets this signal to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 428 - 
COM <Rxxxx+1.6> 
 [Name] Message transmission start signal 
 [Classification] Output signal 
 [Function] Posts the start of transmission of an unsolicited message. 
[Output condition] When transmission of a message to the personal computer is started, this signal is set to 1. 
Upon completion of message transmission, this signal is set to 0. 
RES_CODE <Rxxxx+1.0> to <Rxxxx+1.5> 
 [Name] Message response reception result signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Classification] Output signal 
 [Function] Posts the reception result of a response to an unsolicited message. 
[Output condition] The reception result of a response to a message is set. After reading this signal, the ladder 
program clears REQ to 0. The CNC (communication function) then clears this signal to 0. 
NOTE 
 For details of RES_CODE, refer to Chapter 5, "Unsolicited Messaging Function", in the 
“Data Window Library Specifications" supplied with the FOCAS1/2 library.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Timing chart of PMC address signals for control
The timing chart of PMC address signals for control based on the response notification method is 
described below. 
In the example below, an unsolicited message is transmitted once after reception of the FOCAS2 function 
cnc_unsolicstart then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop is received. 
(2) 
(3) 
(4) 
(5) 
(1) 
(6) 
(7) 
Transmission completed Receive data valid 
Not Ready Ready Sending... Receiving... Completed Ready Not Ready


key: chroma:document
string_value:
REQ (ladder program →
communication function) 
COM (communication function 
→ ladder program) 
RES (communication function 
→ ladder program)
State 
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart 
RES_CODE (communication 
function → ladder program) 
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop 
(1) After checking that RES is set to 0, the ladder program prepares a message then sets REQ to 1. 
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function sets COM to 1 then transmits the message.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Upon completion of message transmission, the communication function sets COM to 0. 
(4) Upon reception of a response to the message, the communication function sets RES_CODE then sets 
RES to 1. 
(5) Because of RES set to 1, the ladder program reads RES_CODE then sets REQ to 0. 
(6) Because of REQ set to 0, the communication function clears RES_CODE to 0. 
(7) The communication function sets RES to 0. 
NOTE 
 For details of the states, see "Display items" in Subsection, "Mode selection".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 429 -
When a PMC address for control is used (simplified method)
A description of using a PMC address for control in a ladder program according to the simplified method
is provided below.
NOTE
A combination of a PMC address for control and a macro variable for 
transmission is also usable. In this case, note that the read timing of the value of 
a macro variable to be transmitted cannot be identified when viewed from the 
ladder program.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ladder program.
In the description below, a PMC address is used for both of control and 
transmission.
Explanation of PMC address signals for control
A detailed description of PMC address signals for control used to execute the unsolicited messaging 
function is provided below. A PMC address area for control consists of 1 byte.
The description below assumes that Rxxxx (with no PMC path number specified) is used as a PMC
address for control.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx#7>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx#7>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input/Output signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message at a PMC address for transmission, the ladder
program sets this signal to 1. The message is then transmitted to the personal computer. 
Upon reception of a response to the message, the CNC (communication function) clears 
this signal to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
this signal to 0.
Timing chart of PMC address signals for control
The timing chart of PMC address signals for control based on the simplified method is described below.
In the example below, an unsolicited message is transmitted once after reception of the FOCAS2 function
cnc_unsolicstart then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Transmission completed
Not Ready Ready Sending... Receiving... Completed Ready Not Ready
(5)
Response received
REQ (ladder program ↔


key: chroma:document
string_value:
REQ (ladder program ↔
communication function)
Transmission processing by 
communication function
Reception processing by 
communication function
State
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop
(1) After checking that REQ is set to 0, the ladder program prepares a message then sets REQ to 1.
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function transmits the message.
(3) The communication function completes message transmission processing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 430 -
(4) Upon reception of a response to the message, the communication function completes reception 
processing.
(5) Because of reception processing completed, the communication function sets REQ to 0.
NOTE
For details of the states, see "Display items" in Subsection, "Mode selection".
When a macro variable for control is used (simplified method)
A description of using a macro variable for control in an NC program according to the simplified method


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is provided below.
Macro variables for control are classified as custom macros and RTM macros, but the same execution
method is applicable.
NOTE
A combination of a macro variable for control and a PMC address for 
transmission is also usable. In this case, note that the read timing of the value of 
PMC data to be transmitted cannot be identified when viewed from the NC
program.
In the description below, a macro variable is used for both of control and 
transmission.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
transmission.
Explanation of a macro variable for control
A detailed description of a macro variable for control used to execute the unsolicited messaging function
is provided below. One macro variable for control is used.
The description below assumes that #xxxx (with no CNC path number specified) is used as a macro 
variable number for control.
REQ <#xxxx>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input/Output signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message in a macro variable for transmission, the NC
program sets this signal to 1. The message is then transmitted to the personal computer. 
Upon reception of a response to the message, the CNC (communication function) clears 
this signal to 0.
NOTE
A REQ input/output value is a real number. So, "0" means "0.0", and "1" means 
"1.0".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 431 -
Timing chart of a macro variable for control
The timing chart of a macro variable for control based on the simplified method is described below.
In the example below, an unsolicited message is transmitted once after reception of the FOCAS2 function
cnc_unsolicstart then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
0
1 (2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Transmission completed
Not Ready Ready Sending... Receiving... Completed Ready Not Ready
(5)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(5)
Response received
REQ (NC program ↔
communication function)
Transmission processing by 
communication function
Reception processing by 
communication function
State
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop
(1) After checking that REQ is set to 0, the NC program prepares a message then sets REQ to 1.
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function transmits the message.
(3) The communication function completes message transmission processing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(4) Upon reception of a response to the message, the communication function completes reception 
processing.
(5) Because of reception processing completed, the communication function sets REQ to 0.
NOTE
For details of the states, see "Display items" in Subsection, "Mode selection".
Example of using a macro variable for control
An example of using a macro variable for control is provided below.
• Example
[Description]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Example
[Description]
An NC program on CNC path number 1 posts NC command start date and time information as 
an unsolicited message to the personal computer.
[Setting]
As a macro variable for control, volatile RTM variable number #0 (REQ) is used. On the other 
hand, macro variables for transmission are used for date and time information managed inside 
the CNC (system variable numbers #3011 and #3012).
Setting item Set value
CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 4
CONTROL PARAMETER 1:0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CONTROL PARAMETER 1:0
TRANSMISSION NUMBER 2
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3011
NUMBER 1
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.2)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3012
NUMBER 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 432 -
[Example of NC program]
A RTM variable is executed in synchronism with the immediately following NC command
according to the RTM variable specification. At this time, the operation timing of the 
immediately following NC command is not affected.
So, the NC program indicated below posts NC command 2 start date and time information as an 
unsolicited message to the personal computer.
 :
 :
 :
 :
 :
 :
#RV[0]=1; NC program ①
NC command 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NC command 1
Macro call command
NC command 2
RTM variable for control of the unsolicited 
messaging function
//1 ZDO;
ZWHILE[#RV[0] NE 0];
#RV[0]=1;
ZEND;
(1)
One machining 
cycle
(Tip) (1) in the example above corresponds to the number in the timing chart provided earlier.
NOTE
1 Note that if a custom macro is used as a macro for control, the operation timing
of an NC command is affected. If the RTM variable in the example above is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
replaced with a custom macro, for example, NC command 2 becomes 
unexecutable unless the macro variable for control is changed.
2 For details of custom macros and RTM variables, refer to "Operator’s Manual 
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64694EN)".
7.2.6.7 Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 UNM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#4 UNM With the embedded Ethernet port, the unsolicited messaging function is:
0: Not used
1: Used
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0: Not used
1: Used
NOTE
Re-setting this parameter requires turning the power off and on 
again or restarting the embedded Ethernet interface.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14882 UNS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 433 -
#4 UNS In the CNC Unsolicited Messaging function of an embedded Ethernet port, when the end 
of the function is requested by other than the CNC Unsolicited Messaging server 
currently connected:
0: The request for the end of the function is rejected
1: The request for the end of the function is accepted.
NOTE
Re-setting this parameter requires turning the power off and on
again or restarting the embedded Ethernet interface.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7.2.7 Setting of the CNC Screen Web Server Function
This subsection describes the setting required to operate the CNC screen Web server function with the 
embedded Ethernet function.
7.2.7.1 Overview
This subsection provides an overview of the CNC screen Web server function and describes the execution
procedure.
Overview of the CNC screen Web server function
An overview of the CNC screen Web server function is provided below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This function enables screen display and screen switch of CNC on a Web browser of a Tablet-type device
that connects with CNC through Ethernet.
The screen which is displayed on a Web browser is the same as the screen displayed on a standard CNC 
Display unit.
The screen switch operation at a Web browser is reflected in a standard CNC Display unit.
NOTE
1 A Tablet-type device cannot be used instead of a standard CNC Display unit.
2 It is also possible to use a Web browser of the personal computer.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Behavior might be different according to a Tablet-type device and a Web 
browser.
4 The update cycle of the screen on a Tablet-type device slows more than a 
standard CNC Display unit. In addition, it might become slower in the following 
cases.
- System configuration with high CPU load, such as multi-path/multi-axes 
control.
- Operation condition with high CPU load, such as program operation of small 
blocks.
- Bad condition of communication between CNC and Tablet-type device.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 434 -
WARNING
On the screen of Web browser, do not perform the operation which relates to the 
machine operation, e.g. Virtual MDI key function, the data input by soft key, or a 
machine operator's panel screen made by machine tool builder.
The bad condition of communication might cause an unexpected machine 
operation. For example, the off operation of a button on the screen might be lost,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
or the response of a button might be slow. Such an unexpected machine 
operation may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause 
injury to the user.
Therefore, when connecting with Web browser by this function, perform the 
sequences that check Web browser connection status signal WBCNT 
<F0578.2> and prohibit the operation such as the data input and the operation 
from the screen.
Connection status of the CNC screen Web server function


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC connects a Tablet-type device via the embedded Ethernet and a wireless LAN equipment.
Refer to the manual of each equipment for the method of connecting the Tablet-type device and wireless 
LAN equipment.
By starting a Web browser on the Tablet-type device and then inputting a URI, the Tablet-type device is 
connected with CNC.
Connection
NOTE
1 It is not possible to connect CNC with two or more Tablet-type devices at the 
same time. Only the first Tablet-type device can be connected.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 It is not possible to connect CNC while the CNC screen is displayed on a 
personal computer by using CNC screen display function.
The display units of CNC that can be used are as follows.
Table7.2.7.1 (a) Display unit of CNC
CNC Display unit
LCD Mounted Type 10.4” color LCD


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 435 -
NOTE
1 The update of CNC screen on a Tablet-type device might stop temporarily 
according to the CNC system configuration and the operation status. However, it 
doesn’t influence automatic operation of CNC.
2 This function cannot be used in CNC that uses the following display.
- Without standard CNC Display unit (Use PC connecting)
- FANUC iHMI display unit (Use PANEL iH/iH Pro)
- The secondary display unit for Ethernet connection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The shared display unit for Ethernet connection
3 This function cannot be used while connecting iPendant.
4 This function cannot be used by connecting via a PCMCIA Ethernet card.
7.2.7.2 Operation of the WEB SERVER screen
This subsection describes the operation of the WEB SERVER screen for operating the CNC screen Web 
server function.
Procedure
1 Enable the CNC screen Web server function according to "Related parameters" described later.
2 Start the CNC again then press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Soft key [EMBED PORT] is displayed. (Press the continuous menu key until the soft key is 
displayed.)
4 Press soft key [EMBED PORT]. The Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port is 
displayed.
5 Press soft key [WEB]. The WEB SERVER screen is displayed. (Press the continuous menu key until 
the soft key [WEB] is displayed.)
6 After setting items, restart the embedded Ethernet function.
WEB SERVER screen
Press soft key [WEB]. The WEB SERVER screen is displayed.
 
WEB SERVER screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 436 -
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the CNC screen Web server function. If 0 is 
specified, PORT NUMBER is treated as 80.
TIMEOUT Specify a timeout of the CNC screen Web server function. TIMEOUT can be set the 
value of 0, 5 to 99 in seconds. If 0 is specified, TIMEOUT is treated as 10 seconds.
USER NAME Specify a user name to be used for the CNC screen Web server function. (Up to 31


key: chroma:document
string_value:
characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above. (Up to 31 characters can be 
specified.)
Be sure to set a password.
7.2.7.3 Operation of the CNC screen Web server function
This subsection describes the operation of the CNC screen Web server function.
Start of the CNC screen Web server function
Procedure
1 Turn on the power of the CNC.
2 Wait until the CNC screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Start a Web browser on the Tablet-type device and input URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) “http://
<IP Address>(:[port number])/cncscrn/”. The last “/” is not omissible.
(Example 1) Case of IP Address (192.168.1.1) and PORT NUMBER (0 or 80)
 Input “http://192.168.1.1/cncscrn/” to the address bar.
Input case 1
(Example 2) Case of IP Address (192.168.1.1) and PORT NUMBER (8501)
 Input “http://192.168.1.1:8501/cncscrn/” to the address bar.
Input case 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Input case 2
4 When the login screen is displayed, input the username and password, and push the login button.
login screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 437 -
NOTE
1 When the Web browser connection prohibition signal WBEND <G0579.5> is set
to “1”, the error “Access Denied : Forbidden by signal” is displayed.
2 When the Web browser connection status signal WBCNT <F0578.2> is “1”, the 
error “Access Denied : Doubly access” is displayed.
3 When the parameter WAL(No.14882#6) is set to 0 and failing in login 
continuously five times, CNC screen Web server function becomes disabled until


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the CNC is restarted.
5 The CNC screen is displayed on a Web browser, and the Web browser connection status signal 
WBCNT <F0578.2> becomes “1”.
CNC screen on a Web browser
NOTE
The update cycle of the screen slows more than a standard CNC Display unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 438 -
End of the CNC screen Web server function
The communication with CNC ends in the following cases.
- When Web browser on Tablet-type device is ended.
- When the connection of CNC and Tablet-type device is cut.
- When the Web browser connection prohibition signal WBEND <G0579.5> is set to "1".
- When CNC screen function is started on other personal computer.
- When END button on the Web browser is pushed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
After the time interval that set on WEB SERVER screen is passed, the Web browser connection status 
signal WBCNT <F0578.2> becomes "0".
To reconnect with the CNC, execute procedure 3 of "Start of CNC screen Web server function" after the 
Web browser connection status signal WBCNT <F0578.2> becomes “0”.
NOTE
CNC cannot be operated with MDI key and touch panel of CNC while the Web 
browser connection status signal WBCNT <F0578.2> is “1”, even if the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
communication with CNC ends. The maximum time that CNC cannot be 
operated is the time having set to TIME INTERVAL.
Operation on Web browser
This subsection explains the operation method in a Web browser.
NOTE
While connecting with Web browser, neither MDI key nor touch panel of CNC 
can be used for operation.
The reset key of CNC and External key input, however, are always usable on the 
CNC.
Operation by button
Function keys, help key, and page keys are displayed as buttons.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC screen changes according to each key if these buttons are pushed.
Selected item on the screen is changed if cursor keys are pushed.
If [VF9] button is pushed, short-cut menu by vertical keys is displayed and the operation by touch screen 
becomes possible.
[End] button is displayed in the upper part of screen. 
The communication with CNC ends by pushing the [END] button.
Button on a Web browser
Operation by touch screen
Tap Soft key on the CNC screen and button can be pushed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC can be operated with each key by pushing function key and page key.
Double tap CNC screen size is set to be suitable for the screen size of Tablet-type device.
Pinch out / Pinch in CNC screen is expanded and reduced. Pinch out is expansion, and Pinch in is 
reduction.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 439 -
Refer to the manual of Tablet-type device for explanation of each operation.
NOTE
1 To perform the Tap operation on the screen made by machine tool builder using 
C language executor, it is necessary to realize the operation with touch panel.
2 The communication with CNC might become interrupted during the operation of 
Pinch out / Pinch in. If the time having set to TIME INTERVAL passed, the 
communication of CNC and a Tablet-type device is cut.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Operation by direction of Tablet-type device
The direction of screen is changed automatically according to the direction of Tablet-type device.
Operation by key input
When the value of parameter KIE is one, the text input area, SEND button and CLEAR button next to the 
cursor keys, and the key input becomes possible.
Button on a Web browser
If SEND button is pushed, the character string in the text input area is transmitted to the key-in buffer of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC. If CLEAR button is pushed, the key-in buffer of CNC is cleared.
The following characters can be input to the text input area.
Enable character Remarks
a-z, A-Z, 0-9 Alphanumeric characters
!”#&’()*+,-<=>?@[/]^`~.;:~ Special symbols
Space Blank
NOTE
"{", "|", "}", "$", "¥" and 2-byte code used for Japanese cannot be sent to the 
key-in buffer of CNC.
Input / Output of CNC data
CNC data is input/output from/to CNC according to the setting of CNC by operation on Web browser 
screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen.
The data cannot be input/output from/to the Web browser side.
Display language
The title and buttons on Web browser are displayed in English.
NOTE
The display language of CNC screen is displayed according to the setting of 
CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 440 -
Type of display screen
The screens of CNC displayed in Web browser is the same as the screens displayed in CNC. It is not 
possible to display different size or kind of screens from CNC.
NOTE
1 Boot screen and IPL screen cannot be displayed.
2 When the system alarm is generated by CNC, the connection of Tablet-type 
device is cut. The system alarm screen is not displayed in Web browser.
7.2.7.4 Related signals
Signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Signal
Web browser connection prohibition signal WBEND <G579.5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Forbid the connection with Web browser.
[Operation] “0”: Permit the connection with Web browser.
“1”: Forbid the connection with Web browser.
The connection is shut while connecting with Web browser.
Web browser connection status signal WBCNT<F578.2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Show the status of the connection with Web browser.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 when connecting with Web browser.
This signal is set to 0 when not connecting with Web browser.
NOTE
Perform the sequences that check this signal and prohibit the 
operation which relates to the machine operation such as the data 
input and the operation from the screen, e.g. Virtual MDI key 
function, the data input by soft keys, or the operation on a machine 
operator’s panel screen made by machine tool builder.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0579 WBEND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0578 WBCNT
7.2.7.5 Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11373 WSE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 441 -
#7 WSE CNC screen Web server function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14882 WAL KIE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.
#5 KIE In CNC screen Web server function, key input is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#6 WAL In CNC screen Web server function, when failing in login continuously five times, this 
function becomes:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
function becomes:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
When CNC screen Web server function has become disabled, 
restart the CNC.
7.2.8 CNC STATUS NOTIFICATION FUNCTION
This subsection describes the setting required to operate the CNC status notification function with the 
embedded Ethernet function.
7.2.8.1 Overview
CNC status notification function is provided in the method of Monitoring the alarm even if the operator is 
not in front of the machine.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
not in front of the machine.
This function delivers E-mail of the information about CNC status (for example, alarm number and alarm 
message) to the e-mail software of a portable terminal or a personal computer via the Embedded Ethernet.
Machine
(POP server) Portable terminal
(POP client)
E-mail
Alarm
occurs
Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 442 -
NOTE
1 This function can be used on Embedded Ethernet port and cannot be used on 
PCMCIA LAN card. 
2 This function does not use an e-mail server on the way, to deliver E-mail.
Therefore, this function is used only in the Intranet. E-mail cannot be delivered to 
an external device on Internet.
3 The e-mail software of a portable terminal reads E-mail from CNC with this 
function. Therefore, E-mail is read according to the timing that the e-mail


key: chroma:document
string_value:
software of a portable terminal acquires.
4 In the above figure, CNC communicates with a portable terminal by using 
wireless LAN. However, it is also possible to communicate with a personal 
computer by using wired LAN.
5 This function is not “short message service(SMS)” using the cellular phone 
network.
Therefore, the cellular phone not to be connectable with wireless LAN cannot be 
used.
7.2.8.2 Contents of E-mail


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7.2.8.2 Contents of E-mail
This function creates E-mail and delivers it to the mail software of a portable terminal and a personal 
computer.
There are two kinds of E-mail, "Alarm mail" and "Status mail".
When the displayed language of the CNC screen is Japanese, English, or Simplified Chinese, the title and 
each item name of the mail can be displayed in each language. In the case of other languages, the title and 
each item name of the mail are displayed in English.
Alarm Mail


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Alarm Mail
The alarm mail reports the information of CNC alarm status.
The alarm mail is made at the following cases.
(1) When the alarm is newly generated
(2) When the alarm is canceled
(3) When the number of generated alarms is changed
When two or more alarms have been generated, those alarms are constructed into one alarm mail.
The number of alarms included in one alarm mail is up to 10, and more alarms are not reported.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The order of the notified alarm is the order displayed on the alarm screen of CNC.
In the multi-path system, the alarms are gathered in order of path. Therefore, for example if ten alarms or 
more are generated in the first path, the alarms which are generated in the second path or later are not 
reported.
Moreover, the alarm message is reported when the displayed language of the CNC screen is Japanese, 
English, and Simplified Chinese.
Only the alarm number is written in the case of other languages.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 443 -
 
When the alarm is generated When the alarm is canceled
Alarm Mail
NOTE
When the following alarms are generated, the alarm status is reported.
- PS/BG/SR/SW/SV/OT/IO/PW/SP/OH/DS/IE alarms
- External alarm message (EX alarm)
- Macro alarm message of #3000 (MC alarm)
Status Mail
The status mail reports the counter values of the total number of machined parts, number of machined


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parts and number of parts required when bit 5 (SNP) of parameter No. 14884 is one.
The status mail is made at the following cases:
(1) When the counter values of number of machined parts is changed.
Status mail
NOTE
The total number of machined parts, number of machined parts and number of 
parts required of only the first path are reported even in the case of multi-path 
CNC.
Even if the number of machined parts of the second CNC path or later is 
changed, it is not reported.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 444 -
Message Mail
The message mail reports the message (external operator message or macro message) required when 
parameter SNO (No.14884#4) is one.
The message mail is made at the following cases:
(1) When the message is newly generated
(2) When the number of generated message is changed
(3) When the message is canceled
When two or more messages have been generated, those messages are constructed into one message mail.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The number of messages included in one message mail is up to 3, and more messages are not reported.
The order of the notified message is the order displayed on the operator message screen of CNC.
The message number, message content, and machine group number of each machine group are notified in 
external operator message.
The message and path number of each path are notified in macro message.
In the multi-path system, the messages are gathered in order of the path regardless of machine group. And


key: chroma:document
string_value:
in the path, the messages are gathered in order of external operator message and macro message. 
Therefore, for example in the machine configuration to which path 1 and 2 belong to machine group 1 
and path 3 belong to machine group 2, if three external operator messages or more are generated in the 
machine group 1, the macro message generated in the machine group 1 and the message generated in the 
machine group 2 are not reported.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
And if one external operator message is generated in the machine group 1, one macro message is 
generated in the path 1 and one external operator message is generated in the machine group 2, the macro 
message generated in the path 3 is not reported.
Moreover, the message content is reported when the displayed language of the CNC screen is Japanese, 
English, and Simplified Chinese.
Only the message number (or the string “MCR” in Macro message) is reported in the case of other 
languages.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
languages.
 
When the message is generated When the message is canceled
Fig.7.2.8.2 (a) Message mail
NOTE
As for the macro message, this function supports English only.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 445 -
7.2.8.3 Cooperation with CNC screen Web server function
URI(CNC screen) of CNC screen Web server function is added in the mail when CNC screen Web server 
function is enabled. The CNC screen can be displayed on Web a browser by clicking
 
Mail client Web browser
Cooperation with CNC screen Web server function
NOTE
Please refer to Technical Report of CNC Screen Web server function for details of
this function.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
this function.
7.2.8.4 Setting of CNC Status Notification function
This section describes how to set the CNC parameters for CNC Status Notification function.
The setting of the Portable terminal (POP client), please refer to the manual of the Portable terminal or 
Technical Report (A-94974)
Procedure
(1) Press function key .
(2) Soft key [EMBED PORT] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Press soft key [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for embedded Ethernet port is 
displayed.
(4) Press soft key [COMMON] and [MAIL] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 446 -
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is displayed.
COMMON screen (BACIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 447 -
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call a desired COMMON 
screen (DETAIL).
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter a desired CNC host name.
On CNC Status Notification function, this host name is written as “Machine Name” in E-mail.
If no host name is set, “NC-<MAC address>” is automatically set.
Example of host name automatically set: NC-080019000001


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MAIL SETTING screen
Press soft key [MAIL]. The MAIL SETTING screen is displayed.
MAIL SETTING screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 448 -
Setting items
Item Description
POP SERVER PORT 
NUMBER
Specify the port number of POP server.
Usually, set 110.
If this value is 0, this value is treated as 110.
SMTP SERVER PORT 
NUMBER
(Note 1)
Specify the port number of SMTP server.
Usually, set 25.
If this value is 0, this value is treated as 25.
USER NAME
(Note 2)
Specify the user name to login to the POP server.
A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.
PASSWORD


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PASSWORD
(Note 2)
Specify the password for the above user name.
A password of up to 31 characters can be specified.
NOTE
1 SMTP is not actually used in this function.
However, when creating a mail account, a portable terminal might check the 
SMTP setting. For this case, the SMTP server port number is necessary.
2 The user name and password of mail account in a portable terminal (POP client) 
have to match with these settings to login to CNC (POP server).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
However, if neither user name nor password is set in CNC, CNC does not check 
them when a portable terminal tries to connect to CNC. Thus in this case, the 
login to CNC always succeeds regardless of any user name and password in a 
portable terminal.
7.2.8.5 Related NC parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14884 SNE SNM SNP SNL
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When the following parameters are set, the power must be turned 
off before operation is continued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#0 SNL When failing in login continuously five times from a portable terminal, CNC Status 
Notification function becomes:
0: Disabled.
1: Still enabled.
NOTE
When CNC Status Notification function has become disabled, 
please restart the CNC.
#4 SNO In CNC Status Notification function, the message mail is::
0: Not made.
1: Made.
#5 SNP The total number of machined parts, number of machined parts and number of parts 
required:
0: is not included in the status mail.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 449 -
#6 SNM When the displayed language of CNC screen is Japanese, English or Simplified Chinese, 
the alarm message:
0: is included in the alarm mail.
1: is not included in the alarm mail.
NOTE
When the displayed language of the CNC screen is not Japanese, 
English or Simplified Chinese, the alarm message is not included 
in the alarm mail regardless of this parameter. In this case, only 
the alarm number is reported.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the alarm number is reported.
#7 SNE CNC Status Notification function:
0: is not used.
1: is used.
NOTE
If this parameter is not set, the setting screen of CNC Status 
Notification function is not displayed.
7.2.9 Backing Up and Restoring Communication Parameters
This subsection describes operations for backing up the communication parameters for the embedded 
Ethernet in a memory card or USB memory and restoring them from a memory card. Which memory,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
memory card or USB memory, is to be used in backup/restoration is determined using NC parameter No. 
20. For descriptions of the USB memory specifications and restrictions, refer to Section "USB Functions", 
in "Operator's Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64694EN)".
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the 
continue key.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, 
press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON], [(OPRT)], and [+] in this order. Soft keys for backing up and restoring 
communication parameters, [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], and [ALL RESTORE], 
appear as shown below.
5 Press soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. Soft keys 
[EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear.
6 Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer and press soft key 
[EXECUTE]. The relevant operation is executed.
During execution, “EXECUTING” blinks.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 450 -
BACKUP
Saves the communication parameters for the embedded Ethernet that are stored in the SRAM of the CNC 
in such as memory card.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, it is used in saving parameters to a memory unit such as a 
memory card. If no file name is specified, file name “EMBETHER.MEM” is used.
RESTORE
Reads the communication parameters for the embedded Ethernet that are stored in such as memory card


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and saves them in the SRAM of the CNC.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, it is used in reading parameters from a memory unit such as 
a memory card. If no file name is specified, a file having file name “EMBETHER.MEM” is read.
ALL BACKUP
Saves all valid communication parameters for the embedded Ethernet, fast Ethernet/fast data server, 
PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, and CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Scanner/Adapter, Modbus/TCP Server, and PROFINET IO Controller/IO Device that are stored in the 
SRAM of the CNC in such as memory card.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, it is used in saving parameters to a memory unit such as a 
memory card. If no file name is specified, file name “NETWORK.MEM” is used.
ALL RESTORE
Reads all valid communication parameters for the embedded Ethernet, fast Ethernet/fast data server,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, and CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP 
Scanner/Adapter, Modbus/TCP Server, and PROFINET IO Controller/IO Device that are stored in such 
as memory card and saves them in the SRAM of the CNC.
If the communication function relevant to any valid parameter is disabled on the CNC, however, the 
communication parameter is not saved in the SRAM.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, it is used in reading parameters from a memory unit such as 
a memory card. If no file name is specified, a file having file name “NETWORK.MEM” is read.
CAUTION
When you are gaining access to an external input/output device, such as a 
memory card and USB memory, do not turn off the power to the CNC or 
disconnect the external input/output device. It is likely that doing so may damage 
the external input/output device.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 451 -
NOTE
1 Communication parameters can be backed up and restored only in the MDI 
mode, EDIT mode, or the emergency stop state.
2 Restoring communication parameters causes an alarm requiring the power to be 
turned off to be issued.
Related parameters
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 4 : Select the memory card as the input/output device.
17 : Select the USB memory as the input/output device.
Any input/output device other than those listed above cannot be used to back up or 
restore communication parameters.
7.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET 
DEVICES
There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet 
card.
Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear. 
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], press soft key [COMMON], and then press 
[(OPRT)] to display soft key [EMB/PCMCIA].
4 Pressing soft key [EMB/PCMCIA] switches between enabled devices.
NOTE
1 Information on a switched device is stored in nonvolatile memory. 
On the next power-on, the device last selected can be used as is.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 When using the unsolicited messaging function, note the following:
• Processing is forcibly started from the "Not Ready" state, regardless of the 
unsolicited message transfer state.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the response notification 
method, RES and RES_CODE (0x01) are posted to the ladder program.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the simplified method, REQ is 
cleared.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 452 -
7.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS
7.4.1 FTP File Transfer Function
The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below.
Host file list display
A list of the files held on the host computer is displayed.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press soft key [FOLDER]. The program folder screen appears. (If the soft key does not appear, press 
the continuous menu key.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the continuous menu key.)
3 Press soft keys [(OPRT)] and [DEVICE CHANGE] in that order. The soft keys for selectable 
devices appear.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 453 -
4 Press soft key [EMB ETHER]. The program directory screen is changed to the contents of the hard 
disk on the host computer (embedded Ethernet host file list screen). On this screen, you can operate 
files.
Embedded Ethernet host file list screen
NOTE
When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the 
embedded Ethernet port.
The two conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file list 
screen:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen:
(1) Check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. Make a selection 
in "DEVICE SELECTION" on the Ethernet setting screen.
(2) A host computer can be selected from connection destinations 1, 2, and 3. 
Make a selection according to the [HOST] soft key described later.
5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be switched using the page keys 
.
Display item
AVAILABLE DEVICE
The currently selected device is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Check that the embedded Ethernet port is selected currently.
CONNECT HOST
Number of the currently connected host of the host computer
REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of files in the current folder.
DEVICE
Current device. When the embedded Ethernet host file list is selected, “EMB_ETHER” is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 454 -
CURRENT FOLDER
Current work folder in the host computer
FILE LIST
Information of the files and folders in the host computer
Operation list
DEVICE CHANGE
Enables a device to be selected from the program folder screen. To select the embedded Ethernet host file 
list, press soft key [EMB ETHER].
DETAIL ON, DETAIL OFF 
Switches between the outline and detailed file lists.
CREATE FOLDER
Creates a new subfolder in the current work folder.
DELETE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.
RENAME
Renames a file or folder.
HOST CHANGE
Changes the connected host computer.
SEARCH
Searches the current folder for a file.
REFRESH
Updates the information displayed on the embedded Ethernet host file list screen.
7.4.1.1 Displaying and operating the file list
REFRESH, DETAIL ON, DETAIL OFF
Update the file list data or change the file list type.
1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the file list data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display only file names.
3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display file attributes, sizes, dates, and file names.
NOTE
The items displayed in the detailed list depend on the FTP server setting on the 
host computer.
Moving a folder
Move a folder.
1 Select a folder you want to move using cursor keys and .
2 Press MDI key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 455 -
CREATE FOLDER
Create a new folder.
1 Move to a folder in which you want to create a new folder.
2 Enter a folder name.
3 Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
DELETE
Delete a file or folder.
1 Select a file or folder you want to delete using cursor keys and .
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• To execute the deletion, press soft key [EXEC].
• To cancel the deletion, soft key [CANCEL].
DELETE (multiple files)
Delete multiple files at a time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press soft key [SELECT START].
2 Select a file or folder you want to delete using cursor keys and .
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
The selected file is highlighted.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each file you want to delete.
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
- To execute the deletion, press soft key [EXEC].
- To cancel the deletion, soft key [CANCEL].
NOTE
Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
RENAME
Rename a file or folder.
1 Select a file or folder you want to rename using cursor keys and .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Enter a new file or folder name.
3 Press soft key [RENAME].
SEARCH
Search the current work folder for a file.
1 Enter a file name.
2 Press soft key [SEARCH].
HOST CHANGE
Change the connected host computer.
1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE].
The connected host number changes from 1 to 2 to 3, then back to 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 456 -
7.5 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
Communication using the embedded Ethernet can be restarted.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear. 
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], press soft key [COMMON], and then press 
[(OPRT)] to display soft key [RSTART].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Pressing soft key [RSTART] resets embedded Ethernet communication and then restarts it.
NOTE
1 Pressing soft key [RSTART] forcibly interrupts communication even when it is in 
progress.
2 This function makes a restart by software. An actual restart may be impossible 
under some conditions.
3 When using the unsolicited messaging function, note the following:
• Processing is forcibly started from the "Not Ready" state, regardless of the 
unsolicited message transfer state.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• When the parameter for control is set to use the response notification 
method, RES and RES_CODE (0x01) are posted to the ladder program.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the simplified method, REQ is 
cleared.
7.6 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET 
FUNCTION
With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen is available.
The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the embedded Ethernet function operates 
abnormally.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
abnormally.
Displaying and operating the PING screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear. 
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 By pressing the [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet is 
displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet 
card can be set.
4 Press soft key [PING] and then press [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 To send the PING command to connection destination 1 for FTP file transfer, press soft key [PING 
FTP1] Similarly, to send the PING command to connection destination 2 or 3, press [PING FTP2] or 
[PING FTP3], respectively.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 457 -
PING connection status screen
6 To send the PING command to the desired destination, enter the address of the destination on the 
PING setting screen. (Page keys are used for switching.)
PING connection status screen
7 After entering the address and the repeat count, press the soft key [PING EXEC]. The specified 
number of PING commands are sent to the specified destination.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 458 -
Displaying Communication status screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear. 
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 By pressing the [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet is 
displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet 
card can be set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
card can be set.
4 To display the communication status of the embedded Ethernet, press soft key [COM STATE].
Page keys can be used to switch between the sending state and the receiving state.
 
Communication status screen
Display items
Item Description
BAUDRATE Displays the baud rate and transmission method. 
Transmission rate: 100Mbps or 10Mbps
Transmission method: Full duplex or half duplex 
-------- : Not connected to HUB 
SEND PACKET Displays the number of transmitted packets.
COLLISION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
COLLISION
CARRIER SENSE LOST
DELAYOVER
UNDERRUN
SEND PARITY ERROR
Displays the number of errors detected during transmission of packets. 
RECEIVE PACKET Displays the number of packets received. 
ALIGNMENT ERROR
CRC ERROR
OVERRUN ERROR
FRAME LENGTH ERROR
RECV PARITY ERROR
Displays the number of errors detected during reception of packets. 
AVAILABLE DEVICE Currently available device of embedded Ethernet
Displays either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 459 -
TASK STATE screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, 
press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively.
4 Pressing soft key [TASK STATUS] causes the task status of the embedded Ethernet function to be 
displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed. 
 
TASK STATE screen
The following symbols are used.
Symbol and meaning
FOCAS2 #0 C: Waiting for a connection from the host 
W: Data processing in progress (1) 
D: Data processing in progress (2)
N: FOCAS2 out of service
FOCAS2 #1,#2 W: Data processing in progress (1) 
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
SCREEN W: Data processing in progress (1) 
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
UDP W: Data processing in progress (1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
PMC W: Data processing in progress (1) 
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
FTP C: Execution wait
W: Data processing in progress (1) 
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
REMOTE DIAG W: Data processing in progress (1) 
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 460 -
Symbol and meaning
UNSOLICITED MSG W: Data processing in progress (1) 
D: Data processing in progress (2)
N: Abnormal state
X: Not yet executed
Number: Alive signal (UDP) transmission in progress when count-up 
operation is performed
iPendant C: Waiting for a connection from iPendant
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
WEB SERVER C: Waiting for a connection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
Modbus SERVER C: Waiting for a connection
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
Number: Number of sockets currently connected
MAIL W: Data processing in progress (1) 
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
7.7 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET 
FUNCTION
This screen displays the log of the embedded Ethernet function.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 If alarm SR2032, “EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA SERVER ERROR” is issued 
during data transfer using the embedded Ethernet function, check the error
details on the log screen of the embedded Ethernet function.
2 The log information for the embedded Ethernet function is stored in volatile 
memory and it is lost when the power of CNC is turned off. If an error occurs, 
check the log information before turning the power off.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 461 -
Displaying the log screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 To display the log screen for the embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key 
[EMBED LOG] or [PCMCIA LOG], respectively. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue 
key.)
LOG screen
The newest error log appears at the top of the screen. The date and time when an error occurred are


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed at the right end of the line. The format of date and time data is “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss” where 
MMM represents a month, dd represents a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ss 
represents seconds.
The date and time of the upper item shown above is October 16, 12:57:06.
To clear the log, press soft keys [(OPRT)] and [CLEAR] in that order.
The log for each function can be displayed by using soft keys on the embedded Ethernet log screen.
(1) Soft key [ALL]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1) Soft key [ALL]
Displays all log related to the embedded Ethernet.
(2) Soft key [COMMON]
Displays the log related to the parameter settings of the embedded Ethernet function and the basic 
communication function.
(3) Soft key [FOCAS2]
Displays the log related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
(4) Soft key [FTP TRANS]
Displays the log related to FTP file transfer.
(5) Soft key [UNSOLT MSG]
Displays the log related to the unsolicited messaging function.
(6) Soft key [WEB]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(6) Soft key [WEB]
Displays the log related to the CNC screen Web server function.
(7) Soft key [Modbus]
Displays the log related to the Modbus/TCP Server function.
(8) Soft key [REMOTE DIAG]
Displays the log related to the Machine Remote Diagnosis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 462 -
(9) Soft key [MAIL]
Displays the log related to the CNC Status Notification function.
Error and message
Error 
No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-0118
E-0119
Error occurred while wait for FOCAS2 pdu A communication error has occurred because of any of 
the following:
→ The network quality has been lowered to such a level 
that data cannot be received from a PC at the other 
end. The communication channel has been logically


key: chroma:document
string_value:
shut down.
→ Software running on a PC at the other end has 
logically shut down the communication channel. 
→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
E-011A All communication paths are busy All the FOCAS2/Ethernet communication channels are 
busy.
E-0126 No response from RMT DIAG server The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis 
accepting server may be invalid or the power to the 
machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be off. 
Check whether the IP address of the machine remote


key: chroma:document
string_value:
diagnosis accepting server is valid and whether the power 
to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is on.
Alternatively, the machine remote diagnosis accepting 
server may not respond to the PING command to 
increase the security level (such as a firewall setting).
Set bit 1 of parameter No.14880 to 1 and connect the 
server again.
E-0148 Cannot save parameter for Unsolicited 
Message
When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 was 
received, the parameter for the unsolicited messaging


key: chroma:document
string_value:
function could not be saved for one of the following
causes:
→ The mode of the unsolicited messaging function is 
not set to "PC mode".
→ The state of the unsolicited messaging function is not 
"Not Ready".
→ The argument "parameter-for-unsolicited-message" 
of the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 includes 
an invalid value.
E-0149 The received parameter for Unsolicited 
Message is wrong
When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2, 
cnc_rdunsolicprm2, cnc_unsolicstart, or cnc_unsolicstop


key: chroma:document
string_value:
was received, the argument 
"parameter-number-for-unsolicited-message" was found 
to be invalid.
E-0200 Received message from FTP server A message sent by the FTP server is directly displayed.
E-0202 Connection failed with FTP server Software of the FTP server may not be running. Start the 
software of the FTP server. 
E-0207 The router is not found The specified IP address of the router may be wrong. 
Alternatively, the router may be turned off. Check whether


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 463 -
Error 
No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-0208 The FTP server is not found The specified IP address of the FTP server may be 
wrong. Alternatively, the FTP server may be turned off. 
Check whether the IP address of the FTP server has 
been correctly specified and whether the FTP server is 
turned on. 
There is also the possibility that the FTP server does not 
respond to the PING command to enhance security (such


key: chroma:document
string_value:
as a firewall). 
Set parameter PCH (No.14880 #1) to “1” and try 
connecting again.
E-020B Cannot login into FTP server Check whether a correct user name and password are 
specified when logging into the FTP server.
E-020C The parameters of FTP server are wrong Check whether a correct user name and password are 
specified when logging into the FTP server.
E-020D Changing a work folder of host failed Check the work folder logging into the FTP server.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
E-041A Frame transmission failed (TCP) A communication error has occurred because of any of 
the following:
→ The network quality has been lowered to such a level 
that data cannot be received from a PC at the other 
end. The communication channel has been logically 
shut down.
→ Software running on a PC at the other end has 
logically shut down the communication channel. 
→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
→ The communication partner cannot receive data due 
to a firewall etc.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to a firewall etc.
E-0901 Cannot read MAC address The MAC address is not written in the hardware. 
Alternatively, the hardware has been damaged. 
E-0A06 Network is too busy An excessive amount of data is flowing over the network.
One possible solution is to divide the network. 
E-0B00 The own IP address is wrong Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.
E-0B01 The own IP address is not set Specify an IP address.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
E-0B02 Subnet mask is wrong Specify a correct subnet mask in the designated format.
E-0B03 Subnet mask is not set Specify a subnet mask. 
E-0B04 Router IP address is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP 
address of the local node and the IP address of the 
router.
E-0B05 IP address of DNS server is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP 
address of the local node and the IP address of the DNS 
server.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
server.
E-0B06 The own host name is wrong Check whether a correct host name is specified.
E-0B07 The own domain name is wrong Check whether a correct domain name is specified.
E-0B08 TCP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be 
specified. 
E-0B09 UDP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be 
specified.
E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is wrong Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
E-0B0C Port No of a remote FTP server is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be 
specified.
E-0B0D User name of remote FTP server is wrong The specified user name may contain a prohibited 
character.
E-0B0E Password of remote FTP server is wrong The specified password may contain a prohibited 
character.
E-0B0F Login folder of remote FTP srv is wrong The specified log-in folder name may contain a prohibited 
character.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 464 -
Error 
No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-0B18 Cannot set because DHCP is available To allow a set-up, disable the DHCP client function. 
E-0B19
E-0B1A
Embedded Ethernet port isn't found The software or hardware of embedded Ethernet function 
cannot be recognized. Check whether the software has 
been incorporated. Check whether the hardware is sound.
E-0B27 Unsolicited Message function isn't 
available


key: chroma:document
string_value:
available
The software condition for using the unsolicited
messaging function is not satisfied. The cause may be 
one of the following:
→ NC parameters for using the unsolicited messaging
function are not set.
For supported the NC parameters, see Subsection, 
"Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function".
E-0B29 Mode of Unsolicited Message is wrong In the CNC mode, the FOCAS2 function
cnc_wrunsolicprm2 cannot be executed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
E-0B2A Status of Unsolicited Message is wrong The state of the unsolicited messaging function was other 
than "Not Ready", so that the parameters for the 
unsolicited messaging function could not be updated. The
cause may be one of the following:
→ In a state other than "Not Ready", the FOCAS2 
function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 or cnc_unsolicstart was 
executed.
→ In a state other than "Not Ready", soft key [APPLY] 
was pressed.
E-0B2B Cannot refresh parameter of Unsolicited 
Message


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Message
The parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
could not be updated. The cause may be one of the 
following:
→ The problem of E-0B29 or E-0B2A occurred.
→ A parameter for the unsolicited messaging function
includes an invalid value.
E-0B44 Invalid value exists in Transmission 
parameter of Unsolicited Message
The parameter for the unsolicited messaging function, 
TRANSMISSION NUMBER or TRANSMISSION
PARAMETER (NO. 1 to NO. 3), includes an invalid value.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
E-0B45 The total of Transmission size of 
Unsolicited Message exceeds the 
limitation
The sum of sizes specified by the parameters for the 
unsolicited messaging function, TRANSMISSION
PARAMETER NO. 1 to NO. 3, exceeds the maximum
specifiable number of bytes. For the maximum specifiable 
number of bytes, see the setting item "TRANSMISSION 
PARAMETER" in Subsection, "Setting on the CNC
screen".
E-0B47 TCP port number of Modbus/TCP Server 
is wrong


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is wrong
Zero is specified. To use this function, specify TCP port 
number.
E-0B48 Status PMC address of Modbus/TCP 
Server is out of range
A value beyond the permissible setting range is specified. 
Check the status PMC address settings.
E-0B49 Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP 
Server is wrong
An odd-numbered address is specified. Check the data 
PMC address setting.
E-0B4A Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP 
Server is out of range
A value beyond the permissible setting range is specified.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Check the data PMC address setting or data size setting.
E-0B4B Modbus area of Modbus/TCP Server is 
out of range
A value beyond the permissible setting range is specified. 
Check the data Modbus address setting or data size 
setting.
E-1001 All Modbus communication paths are busy The number of connected communication parties 
(Modbus/TCP clients) exceeded the maximum number of 
connectable clients. 
Connections to communication parties (Modbus/TCP


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 465 -
Error 
No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-1003 Version number of Modbus packet is 
wrong
Specify a correct version number according to the 
protocol of Modbus/TCP.
E-1004 Length of Modbus packet is wrong Specify a correct size according to the protocol of 
Modbus/TCP.
E-100B Function code of Modbus packet is wrong The specified function code may not be supported. 
E-1015
E-1016


key: chroma:document
string_value:
E-1015
E-1016
Data address of Modbus packet is wrong Specify a correct data address according to the protocol 
of Modbus/TCP.
E-1017
E-1018
E-1019
Data value of Modbus packet is wrong Specify a correct data address according to the protocol 
of Modbus/TCP.
E-101A Data address that client requested is out 
of range (1-3)
No PMC area is assigned to the Modbus area requested 
from the connected communication party (Modbus/TCP 
client). Assign a PMC area.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
client). Assign a PMC area.
E-1300 (Sent message to Web browser) It is a message transmitted to notify the Web browser of 
the error detected with the Web server.
E-1301 User name is not set Specify a user name.
E-1302 Password is not set Specify a password.
E-1303 User name is wrong Check whether a correct user name.
E-1304 Password is wrong Check whether a correct password.
E-1305 All communication paths are busy All the Web communication channels are busy.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
E-1306 Session ended The connection with the Web browser ended.
E-1307 Session canceled The connection with the Web browser aborted 
compulsorily by either of the following factor.
→ The Web browser connection prohibition signal 
WBEND <G0579.5> became “1”.
→ CNC screen display function started on other 
personal computer.
E-1308 Session started The connection with the Web browser started.
E-1309 Login failed The CNC screen Web server function became disabled. 
Turn off / on the power of the CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
E-1400 (Sent message to POP client) It is not generated usually.
E-1401 (Sent message to SMTP client) It is not generated usually.
E-1402 User name is not set Enter user name
E-1403 Password is not set Enter password
E-1404 User name is wrong Confirm user name
E-1405 Password is wrong Confirm password
E-1406 Login failed CNC Status Notification function has not been usable.
Please restart the CNC.
E-XXXX (No message) An internal error has occurred.
Make a notification of the error number.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 466 -
8 DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of digital servo and adjustment of 
reference position.
8.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS
This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is used for field adjustment of machine 
tool.
1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.
2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
[Input type] Setting input


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 SVS 0: Servo tuning screen is not displayed.
1: Servo tuning screen is displayed.
3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again.
4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following operation: Function key →
→ [SV.PARA].
5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.
(1) Initial set bit
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 DGPRM PLC01
#0 PLC01 0: Values of parameters Nos. 2023 and 2024 are used as they are:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 : Values of parameters Nos. 2023 and 2024 are multiplied by 10.
#1 DGPRM 0: Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done.
1: Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 467 -
(2) Motor ID No.
Set the motor ID No. of the servo motor to be used, with reference to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR 
PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65270EN).
(3) Arbitrary AMR function
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2001 AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR0 (Axis)
* Set "00000000".
(4) CMR
1820 Command multiply ratio
1) When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27
Set value＝ 1 + 100 CMR
2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48
Set value=2×CMR
(5) Turn off the power then back on.
(6) N/M of feed gear (F⋅FG)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(6) N/M of feed gear (F⋅FG)
2084 n for flexible feed gear
2085 m for flexible feed gear
Setting for the a Pulsecoder in the semi-closed mode
F⋅FG numerator (≤ 32767)
=
Necessary position feedback 
pulses per motor revolution
F (as irreducible fraction) ⋅FG denominator (≤ 32767) 1,000,000 (Note 2)
(Note 1)
NOTE
1 For both F⋅FG number and denominator, the maximum setting value (after 
reduced) is 32767.
2 ai Pulsecoders assume one million pulses per motor revolution, irrespective of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
resolution, for the flexible feed gear setting.
3 If the calculation of the number of pulses required per motor revolution involves 
p, such as when a rack and pinion are used, assume π to be approximately 
355/113.
[Example] For detection in 1 mm units, specify as follows: 
Ball screw lead
(mm/rev)
Number of necessary position 
pulses (pulses/rev) F⋅FG
10
20
30
10000
20000
30000
1/100
2/100 or 1/50
3/100
[Example]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3/100
[Example]
If the machine is set to detection in 1,000 degree units with a gear reduction ratio of 10:1 for 
the rotation axis, the table rotates by 360/10 degrees each time the motor makes one turn.
1000 position pulses are necessary for the table to rotate through one degree.
The number of position pulses necessary for the motor to make one turn is: 
360/10 × 1000 = 36000 with reference counter =36000


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 468 -
F⋅FG numerator = 36000 = 36
F⋅FG denominator 1,000,000 1000
Additional F⋅FG (numerator/denominator) examples with a reduction ratio of 1:1
Detection unit Ball screw lead
6mm 8mm 10mm 12mm 16mm 20mm
1mm 6 / 1000 8 / 1000 10 / 1000 12 / 1000 16 / 1000 20 / 1000
0.5mm 12 / 1000 16 / 1000 20 / 1000 24 / 1000 32 / 1000 40 / 1000
0.1mm 60 / 1000 80 / 1000 100 / 1000 120 / 1000 160 / 1000 200 / 1000
Setting for use of a separate detector (full-closed)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
F⋅FG numerator (≤ 32767)
Number of position pulses corresponding to a 
predetermined amount of travel
F⋅FG denominator (≤ 32767) Number of position pulses corresponding to a 
predetermined amount of travel from a 
separate detector
[Example]
To detect a distance of 1 mm using a 0.5 mm scale, set the following:
Numerator of F⋅FG = L/1 = 1
Denominator of F⋅FG L/0.5 2
Other F⋅FG (numerator/denominator) setting examples
Detection unit Resolution of scale
1mm 0.5mm 0.1mm 0.05mm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1mm 0.5mm 0.1mm 0.05mm
1mm 1／1 1／2 1／10 1／20
0.5mm － 1／1 1／5 1／10
0.1mm － － 1／1 1／2
(7) Direction of travel
2022 Rotational direction of motor
111 : Normal (clockwise) -111 : Reverse (counterclockwise)
(8) Number of speed pulses, Number of position pulses
Semi-closed 
loop
Closed loop
Parallel type Serial linear scale Serial rotary scale
Command unit (mm) 1/0.1 1/0.1 1/0.1 1/0.1
Initial bit setting b0=0 b0=0 b0=0 b0=0
Number of speed pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Number of position pulses 12500(*1) (*2 - Example 1) (*2 - Example 1) (*2 - Example 2)
Set 8192 as the number of speed pulses. For the linear motor, make settings according to "Linear Motor 
Parameter Setting" in the ai series parameter manual.
(as irreducible 
fraction) =


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 469 -
NOTE
1 Setting of the number of position pulses for the semi-closed loop (indicated by 
(*1) in the above table)
Set 12500.
2 As the number of position pulses, set the number of pulses fed back from a 
separate detector when the motor makes one revolution. (The flexible feed gear 
has no relevance to the calculation of the number of position pulses.)
Example 1:
When a ball screw (direct connection) with a 10-mm lead and a separate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
detector with a resolution of 0.5 mm per pulse are used
When the motor makes one revolution, the following pulses are fed back from 
the separate detector:
10/0.0005 = 20,000
Accordingly,
Number of position pulses = 20,000
Example 2:
When a serial rotary scale with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses per 
revolution is used, the number of position feedback pulses is exceptionally 
calculated by the following:
12500 × (deceleration ratio between the motor and table)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the deceleration ratio between the motor and table is 10:1, for 
example, the number of position pulses is:
12,500 × (1/10) = 1250
3 When the set number of position pulses is greater than 32767
Set position pulses, using the conversion coefficient for the number of position 
feedback pulses, as follows:
With a position feedback pulse conversion coefficient, the number of position pulses is set using the 
product of two parameters.
2024 Number of position pulses


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2024 Number of position pulses
2185 Conversion coefficient for the number of position feedback pulses
(Example of setting)
When a linear scale with a minimum resolution of 0.1 (m is used and the travel 
distance per motor revolution is 16 mm:
Ns = (travel distance per motor revolution (mm))/(minimum resolution of detector 
(mm))
= 16 mm/0.0001 mm = 160000 (>32767) = 10000 × 16
So, set the following:
A: 10000
B: 16
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A: 10000
B: 16
NOTE
If the detector of the motor is an ai pulse coder (the number of speed pulses = 
8192), select a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, and so on) as a conversion 
coefficient whenever possible. (The position gain value used inside the software 
becomes more accurate.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 470 -
(9) Reference counter
1821 Reference counter capacity for each axis (0 to 99999999)
(a) For the semi-closed loop
Reference counter = Number of position pulses required per motor revolution or the same number divided by an 
integer
NOTE
If the rotation ratio between the motor and table is not an integer when a rotation 
axis is used, a reference counter capacity needs to be set so that the point


key: chroma:document
string_value:
where reference counter = 0 (grid point) always appears at the same position 
relative to the table.
Example of setting)
ai Pulsecoder, semi-closed loop (1 mm detection)
Lead of ball screw
(mm/revolution)
Required number of position pulses
(pulses/revolution) Reference counter Grid width
(mm)
10
20
30
10000
20000
30000
10000
20000
30000
10
20
30
If there is an error between the required number of position pulses per motor revolution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and the setting of the reference counter, the reference position varies, depending on the 
start point. Such an error needs to be eliminated by changing the detection unit. In this 
case, a reference counter capacity may be set using a fraction.
Example of setting)
System with detection unit = 1 mm, ball screw lead = 20 mm/revolution, and deceleration 
ratio = 1/17
(i) Method of setting a reference counter capacity as a fraction
Required number of position pulses per motor revolution = 20000/17


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Set the parameters as follows:
1821 Reference counter capacity of each axis (numerator) (0 to 99999999)
2179 Reference counter capacity of each axis (denominator) (0 to 100)
The parameter for a denominator is not presently displayed on the servo screen. So, a 
denominator needs to be set on the parameter screen.
In this example, set numerator = 20000, and denominator = 17.
NOTE
The reference counter assumes only an integer. So, if a fraction is set for a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
reference counter capacity, the gap to the point where reference counter = 0 is 
compensated for.
(In pulse control theory, a position less than one pulse cannot be controlled. So, 
grid interval compensation is performed so that a grid point error is less than one
detection unit at all times.)
(ii) Method of changing the detection unit
Required number of position pulses per motor revolution = 20000/17
The values of all of the following parameters are multiplied by 17 to change the detection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 471 -
Parameter to be changed Series 0i - F
FFG × 17
CMR × 17
Reference counter × 17
Effective area × 17
Positional deviation limit value during movement × 17
Positional deviation limit value during a stop × 17
Backlash amount × 17
Servo screen
Servo screen
Servo screen
No. 1826, 1827
No. 1828
No. 1829
No. 1851, 1852
As the detection unit is changed from 1 mm to 1/17 mm, the values of all parameters to be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
set using the detection unit must be multiplied by 17.
CAUTION
In addition to the parameters listed above, there are parameters to be set using 
the detection unit.
This change eliminates an error between the required number of position pulses per motor 
revolution and the reference counter.
Required number of position pulses per motor revolution = 20000
Reference counter = 20000
(b) For the closed loop


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(b) For the closed loop
Reference counter = Z phase (reference position) interval/detection unit or the same number divided by an integer
If the reference counter does not assume an integer, see the example of semi-closed loop.
NOTE
If the rotation ratio between the separate detector and table is not an integer 
when a rotation axis is used, a reference counter capacity needs to be set so 
that the point where reference counter = 0 (grid point) always appears at the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
same position relative to the table.
Example of setting)
Example 1)
When Z phase interval = 50 mm and detection unit = 1 mm
Reference counter = 50,000/1 = 50,000
Example 2)
When detection unit = 0.001° with a rotation axis
Reference counter = 360/0.001 = 360,000
Example 3)
When there is only one Z phase as in the case of a linear scale
Set a simple number such as 10000 and 50000 for the reference counter.
6. Turn off the power then back on.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 472 -
8.2 FSSB SETTING SCREEN
Connecting the CNC control unit to servo amplifiers via a high-speed serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo 
Bus, or FSSB), which uses only one fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the amount of cabling in 
machine tool electrical sections. 
Axis settings are calculated automatically according to the interrelationships between axes and amplifiers


key: chroma:document
string_value:
entered on the FSSB setting screen. Parameters Nos. 1023, 2013#0, 2014#0, 3717, 11802#4, 24000 to 
24095, and 24096 to 24103 are specified automatically according to the results of the calculation.
Display
The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB-based amplifier and axis information. This information can also 
be specified by the operator.
1 Press function key .
2 To display [FSSB], press continuous menu key several times.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Pressing the soft key [FSSB] causes the [CONNECTION STATUS] screen (or the previously 
selected FSSB setting screen) to appear, with the following soft keys displayed.
There are seven FSSB setting screens: [CONNECTION STATUS], [SERVO AMPLIFIER SETTING], 
[SPINDLE AMPLIFIER SETTING], [SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE UNIT], [AXIS 
SETTING], [SERVO AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE], and [SPINDLE AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE].
Pressing the soft key [CONECT STATUS] causes the [CONNECTION STATUS] screen to appear.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Pressing the soft key [SERVO AMP] causes the [SERVO AMPLIFIER SETTING] screen to appear.
Pressing the soft key [SPNDLE AMP] causes the [SPINDLE AMPLIFIER SETTING] screen to 
appear.
Pressing the soft key [AXIS] causes the [AXIS SETTING] screen to appear.
Pressing the soft key [PULSE MODULE] causes the [SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE 
UNIT] screen to appear.
Pressing the soft key [SERVO MAINTE] causes the [SERVO AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE] 
screen to appear.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen to appear.
Pressing the soft key [SPNDLE MAINTE] causes the [SPINDLE AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE] 
screen to appear.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 473 -
(1) Connection status screen
The connection status screen displays the connection status of slaves connected to the FSSB at
power-on.
The connection status screen displays the following items:
<1> FSSB1 FSSB line number
The FSSB line number is displayed. (FSSB1: First FSSB line)
<2> HRV2,HRV3,HRV- Current loop
The current loop for each FSSB line is displayed. “HRV-” may be displayed when no servo


key: chroma:document
string_value:
amplifier is connected to the FSSB or an FSSB-related alarm is issued.
<3> SV,SP,PM Slave type
The type of slave connected to the FSSB is displayed. (SV: Servo amplifier, SP: Spindle 
amplifier, PM: Separate detector interface unit)
<4> 1-01 to 1-32 Slave number
An FSSB line number, a hyphen (-), and a slave number (connection number for the line) are 
displayed. (The maximum number of slaves per line is 32.)
<5> XM1,XS1,Y,Z,A,B Program axis name, Spindle name


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The program axis name or spindle name set for each amplifier or separate detector interface 
unit is displayed.
<6> L,M,N,1 Amplifier axis order
The axis order for each amplifier is displayed. (L: First axis for a servo amplifier, M: Second 
axis for a servo amplifier, N: Third axis for a servo amplifier, 1: First spindle for a spindle 
amplifier)
<7> 1 to 8 Connector number
The connector number of a separate detector interface unit is displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 474 -
(2) Servo amplifier setting screen
The servo amplifier setting screen displays servo amplifier information.
The servo amplifier setting screen consists of the following items:
• HRV Current loop
The current loop to be set at FSSB automatic setting is displayed. This value does not indicate 
the current effective current loop. (2: Servo HRV2 control, 3: Servo HRV3 control）
• NO. Slave number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• NO. Slave number
An FSSB line number (1: First FSSB line), a hyphen (-), and a slave number (connection 
number for the line) are displayed. (The maximum number of slaves per line is 32.)
• AMP Amplifier type
This consists of the letter A, which stands for “servo amplifier”, a number indicating the 
placing of the servo amplifier, as counted from that nearest to the CNC, and an alphabetic 
character indicating the axis order in the servo amplifier (L: First axis, M: Second axis, N: 
Third axis).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Third axis).
• The following items are displayed as servo amplifier information:
- SERIES Servo amplifier type and series
(The display of the series name ”βi SV” is not supported)
- CUR. Maximum rating current
• AXIS Controlled axis number
The controlled axis number assigned to the servo amplifier is displayed. “0” is displayed if an 
FSSB-related alarm is issued or no controlled axis number is assigned.
• NAME Program axis name


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• NAME Program axis name
The program axis name corresponding to a particular controlled axis number set in parameter 
No. 1020 is displayed. When the axis number is 0, nothing is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 475 -
(3) Spindle amplifier setting screen
The spindle amplifier setting screen displays spindle amplifier information.
The spindle amplifier setting screen consists of the following items:
• NO. Slave number
An FSSB line number (1: First FSSB line), a hyphen (-), and a slave number (connection 
number for the line) are displayed. (The maximum number of slaves per line is 32.)
• AMP Amplifier type


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• AMP Amplifier type
This consists of the letter B, which stands for “spindle amplifier”, a number indicating the 
placing of the spindle amplifier, as counted from that nearest to the CNC, and an alphabetic 
character indicating the axis order in the spindle amplifier (1: First spindle for a spindle 
amplifier).
• The following items are displayed as spindle amplifier information:
- SERIES Spindle amplifier type and series
- PWR. Maximum output
• SP NUM Spindle number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• SP NUM Spindle number
The spindle number assigned to the spindle amplifier is displayed. “0” is displayed if an 
FSSB-related alarm is issued or no spindle number is assigned.
• NAME Spindle name
The spindle name corresponding to the spindle number is displayed. When the spindle number 
is 0, nothing is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 476 -
(4) Axis setting screen
The axis setting screen displays the information of axis.
The axis setting screen displays the following items. Any item that cannot be set is not displayed. 
(When the first and fifth separate detector interface units are connected and Cs contour control and 
tandem control can be used, the screen shown in above figure is displayed.)
• AXIS Controlled axis number
This item is the placing of the NC controlled axis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• NAME Program axis name for each axis
• AMP FSSB line number and amplifier type of the servo amplifier connected to each axis
• M1 Connector number of the first separate detector interface unit
• M2 Connector number of the second separate detector interface unit
• M3 Connector number of the third separate detector interface unit
• M4 Connector number of the fourth separate detector interface unit
• M5 Connector number of the fifth separate detector interface unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• M6 Connector number of the sixth separate detector interface unit
• M7 Connector number of the seventh separate detector interface unit
• M8 Connector number of the eighth separate detector interface unit
Connector numbers set by FSSB automatic setting are displayed.
• Cs Cs contour controlled axis
The spindle number for the Cs contour controlled axis set by FSSB automatic setting is 
displayed.
• M/S Master axis / Slave axis (Slave axis / Dummy axis)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Either of the following settings is displayed: Master axis/slave axis setting for tandem control 
or slave axis/dummy axis setting for the electronic gear box (EGB) set by FSSB automatic 
setting.
The M1 to M8, Cs, and M/S values are to be set by FSSB automatic setting and do not indicate 
current effective settings. The previous values set normally are displayed first after power-on. “0” is 
displayed when an FSSB-related alarm is issued.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 477 -
(5) Separate detector interface unit screen
The separate detector interface unit screen displays information on separate detector interface units.
The separate detector interface unit screen displays the following items:
• NO............................................ Slave number
An FSSB line number (1: First FSSB line), a hyphen (-), and a slave number (connection 
number for the line) are displayed. (While the maximum number of slaves per line is 32, the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
maximum number of separate detector interface units per line is 4.)
• The following items are displayed as separate detector interface unit information:
- EXT
This consists of the letter M, which stands for "separate detector interface unit", and a 
number indicating the placing of the separate detector interface unit, as counted from that 
nearest to the CNC.
- TYPE
This is a letter indicating the type of the separate detector interface unit.
- PCB ID


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- PCB ID
The ID of the separate detector interface unit is displayed.
The separate detector interface unit ID is followed by SDU (8AXES) when 8-axes 
separate detector interface unit or SDU (4AXES) when 4-axes separate detector interface 
unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 478 -
(6) Servo amplifier maintenance screen
The servo amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance information for servo amplifiers. This 
screen consists of the following two pages, either of which can be selected by pressing the cursor 
keys and .
The servo amplifier maintenance screen displays the following items:
• No........................ Controlled axis number
• NAME................. Program axis name for each axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• AMP.................... FSSB line number and amplifier type of the servo amplifier connected to 
each axis
• SERIES ............... Type and series of the servo amplifier connected to each axis
(The display of the series name ”βi SV” is not supported)
• AXES.................. Maximum number of axes controlled by a servo amplifier connected to each 
axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 479 -
• CUR. ................... Maximum rating current for servo amplifiers connected to each axis
• EDIT ................... Version number of a servo amplifier connected to each axis
• SPEC NUMBER. Amplifier drawing number of the servo amplifier connected to each axis
• SERIAL NUMB.. Serial number of the servo amplifier connected to each axis
(7) Spindle amplifier maintenance screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The spindle amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance information for spindle amplifiers.
This screen consists of the following two pages, either of which can be selected by pressing the 
cursor keys and .
The spindle amplifier maintenance screen displays the following items:
• No........................ Spindle number
• NAME................. Spindle name


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 480 - 
• AMP .................... FSSB line number and amplifier type of the spindle amplifier connected to 
each axis 
• SERIES ............... Type and series of the spindle amplifier connected to each axis 
• AXES .................. Maximum number of axes controlled by a spindle amplifier connected to 
each axis 
• PWR. ................... Rated output of the spindle amplifier connected to each axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• EDIT ................... Version number of a servo amplifier connected to each axis 
• SPEC NUMBER . Amplifier drawing number of the spindle amplifier connected to each axis 
• SERIAL NUMB.. Serial number of the spindle amplifier connected to each axis 
FSSB automatic setting procedure 
To perform FSSB automatic setting, set items on the FSSB setting screens in (1) to (3) below. 
(1) Servo amplifier setting screen 
 The servo amplifier setting screen displays the following items:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• HRV .................... Current loop 
 For this item, enter a value between 2 to 3. 
 If a number that falls outside this range is entered, the warning message, “DATA IS OUT OF 
RANGE” appears. 
• AXIS ................... Controlled axis number 
 For this item, enter a value of between 0 and the maximum number of controlled axes. 
 If a number that falls outside this range is entered, the warning message, “DATA IS OUT OF


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 481 -
(2) Spindle amplifier setting screen
The spindle amplifier setting screen displays the following items:
• SP NUM.............. Spindle number
For this item, enter a value of between 0 and the maximum number of spindles. 
If a number that falls outside this range is entered, the warning message, “DATA IS OUT OF 
RANGE” appears. Setting 0 means that the relevant spindle amplifier is not used.
(3) Axis setting screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Axis setting screen
On the axis setting screen, the following items can be specified:
• M1.............Connector number of the first separate detector interface unit
• M2.............Connector number of the second separate detector interface unit
• M3.............Connector number of the third separate detector interface unit
• M4.............Connector number of the fourth separate detector interface unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 482 -
• M5.............Connector number of the fifth separate detector interface unit
• M6.............Connector number of the sixth separate detector interface unit
• M7.............Connector number of the seventh separate detector interface unit
• M8.............Connector number of the eighth separate detector interface unit
For an axis that uses each separate detector interface unit, enter a connector number using a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
number 1 to 8 (maximum number of connectors on a separate detector interface unit).
When a separate detector interface unit is not used, enter 0. If a number that falls outside this 
range is entered, the warning message, “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” appears. For a separate 
detector interface unit which is not connected, items are not displayed and values cannot be 
entered.
Connector Connector number
JF101 1
JF102 2
JF103 3
JF104 4
JF105 5
JF106 6
JF107 7
JF108 8


key: chroma:document
string_value:
JF106 6
JF107 7
JF108 8
• CS..............Cs contour controlled axis
Enter a spindle number between 1 and the maximum number of spindles for the Cs contour 
controlled axis. When a Cs contour controlled axis is not used, enter 0. If a number that falls 
outside this range is entered, the warning message, “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” appears. 
When Cs contour control cannot be used, this item is not displayed and any value cannot be 
entered.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
entered.
• M/S............ Master axis / Slave axis (Slave axis / Dummy axis)
Enter an odd number for the master axis and an even number for the slave axis for tandem 
control. These numbers must be consecutive and within a range between 1 and the maximum 
number of controlled axes. Enter an odd number for the slave axis and an even number for the 
dummy axis for the electronic gear box (EGB). These numbers must be consecutive and within


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a range between 1 and the maximum number of controlled axes. If a number that falls outside 
this range is entered, the warning message, “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” appears. For the 
slave and dummy axes for EGB, set bit 0 (SYN) of parameter No. 2011 to 1. When both 
tandem control and electronic gear box cannot be used, this item is not displayed and any value 
cannot be entered.
On an FSSB setting screen (other than the connection status screen, servo amplifier maintenance screen,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
or spindle amplifier maintenance screen), pressing the soft key [(OPRT)] displays the following soft keys:
To enter data, place the machine in the MDI mode or the emergency stop state, position the cursor to a 
desired input item position, then enter desired data and press the soft key [INPUT].
(Alternatively, press the key on the MDI unit.)
When the soft key [SETTING] is pressed after data has been entered, a warning message listed below is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed if the entered data contains an error. When the data is valid, the corresponding FSSB-related 
parameters are set up. To restore the previous value normally set if, for example, an entered value is 
incorrect, press the soft key [CANCEL].
When this screen is first displayed after power-on, the previous values set normally are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 483 -
NOTE
For 0i-F, 1st FSSB line, and 1st ~ 4th separate detector interface units are 
available.
FSSB automatic setting warning messages
If an invalid setting is detected at FSSB automatic setting, a warning message listed below is displayed. 
EGB dummy axis setting means setting an even number for M/S on the axis setting screen for an axis for 
which bit 0 (SYN) of parameter No. 2011 is set to 1. EGB slave axis setting means setting an odd number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
for M/S on the axis setting screen for an axis for which bit 0 (SYN) of parameter No. 2011 is set to 1.
Warning message Cause
Cs and M/S are set with the 
same axis
On the axis setting screen, a value is specified for Cs and M/S for an axis. Do not 
specify any value for Cs and M/S simultaneously.
Cs and M1-8 are set with the 
same axis
On the axis setting screen, a value is specified for Cs and Ｍ1-8 for an axis. Do 
not specify any value for Cs and Ｍ1-8 simultaneously.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Same number is set in AXIS On the servo amplifier setting screen, an axis number is set more than once. 
Specify each axis number only once.
Same number is set in SP 
NUM
On the spindle amplifier setting screen, a spindle number is set more than once. 
Specify each spindle number only once.
Same number is set in CS On the axis setting screen, a value is set for Cs more than once. Specify each 
value for Cs only once.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
value for Cs only once.
Same number is set in M/S On the axis setting screen, a value is set for M/S more than once. Specify each 
value for M/S only once.
AXIS and Cs are set with the 
same axis
An axis number for which a value is set for Cs on the axis setting screen is set for 
AXIS on the servo amplifier setting screen. Do not set any axis number for which a 
value is set for Cs, on the servo amplifier setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Too many slaves (HRV3) The maximum number (15) of slaves per FSSB line for servo HRV3 control is 
exceeded. Reduce the number of slaves connected to an FSSB line to 15 or less.
Too many slaves (HRV2) The maximum number (32) of slaves per FSSB line for servo HRV2 control is 
exceeded. Reduce the number of slaves connected to an FSSB line to 32 or less.
AXIS is set with EGB dummy 
axis
An axis number set for EGB dummy axis setting is set for AXIS on the servo


key: chroma:document
string_value:
amplifier setting screen. Do not set any axis number for EGB dummy axis setting, 
on the servo amplifier screen.
M/S setting is illegal(EGB) For M/S, the EGB slave axis setting corresponding to an EGB dummy axis setting 
is not made. Make the EGB slave axis setting.
AXIS is not set with EGB 
slave axis
An axis number for EGB slave axis setting is not set for AXIS on the servo 
amplifier setting screen. Set the axis number for EGB slave axis setting, on the 
servo amplifier setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
AXIS is not set with M/S axis An axis number set for M/S on the axis setting screen is not set for AXIS on the 
servo amplifier setting screen. Set the axis number for M/S, on the servo amplifier 
setting screen.
M/S setting is illegal Invalid M/S setting. Correct the M/S setting.
Setting is illegal(servo) Invalid servo axis setting (servo amplifier setting, axis setting). Correct the servo 
axis setting.
Setting is illegal(spindle) Invalid spindle setting. Correct the spindle setting.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 484 -
8.3 SERVO TUNING SCREEN
8.3.1 Parameter Setting
Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 SVS 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.
1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.
8.3.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen
1 Press function key key, continuous menu key , and soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.
2 Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.
(1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(1) Function bit : Parameter No.2003
(2) Loop gain : Parameter No.1825
(3) Tuning start :
(4) Set period :
(5) Integral gain : Parameter No.2043
(6) Proportional gain : Parameter No.2044
(7) Filter : Parameter No.2067
(8) Velocity gain : Set value (Parameter No.2021)+256
256 ×100
(9) Alarm 1 : Diagnosis No.200
(10) Alarm 2 : Diagnosis No.201
(11) Alarm 3 : Diagnosis No.202


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 485 -
(14) Loop gain : Actual loop gain
(15) Position error : Actual position error (Diagnosis No.300)
(16) Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value.
(when the bit 5 (SPF) of parameter No. 2014 is set to 0)
Actual output(％) : Indicate output value with % to the motor rated value.
(when the bit 5 (SPF) of parameter No. 2014 is set to 1)
(17) Current(A) : Indicate current with A (peak value).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(not indicated if bit 5 (SPF) of parameter No.2014 is set to 1)
(18) Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm 1 OVL LVA OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
Alarm 2 ALD EXP
Alarm 3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
Alarm 4 DTE CRC STB PRM
Alarm 5 OFS MCC LDM PMS FAN DAL ABF
NOTE
The empty fields do not represent alarm codes.
8.4 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD)
Overview
+
Speed
Rapid traverse
(Parameter No. 1420a)
FL rate
(Parameter No. 1425a)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FL rate
(Parameter No. 1425a)
Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (Parameter No. 1620a)
Time
*DECa
PCZ
Grid
Grid shift amount
(Parameter No. 1850)
Reference counter capacity
(Parameter No. 1821)
10mm/rev
10000P
Error 
counter
Proportion 
gain
Speed 
loop CMR M
Counter capacity
10000P
-
Command
×4 (Serial)
Reference 
counter F⋅FG PC
GRID
10000P/rev (Flexible feed gear)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 486 -
Parameter
There are the following related parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs 
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1821 Reference counter size for each axis
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
Set a reference counter size.
As a reference counter size, specify a grid interval for reference position return based on 
the grid method.
When a value less than 0 is set, the specification of 10000 is assumed.
When a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used, set the interval of 
mark 1.
1850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each axis
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in this parameter. 
Up to the maximum value counted by the reference counter can be specified as the grid 
shift.
In case of bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 is 0: Grid shift
In case of bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 is 1: Reference point shift
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
For setting the reference position without dogs, only the grid shift 
function can be used. (The reference position shift function cannot 
be used.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 487 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx APZx OPTx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be 
turned off before operation is continued.
#1 OPTx Position detector
0: A separate pulse coder is not used.
1: A separate pulse coder is used.
NOTE
Set this parameter to 1 when using a linear scale with reference
marks or a linear scale with an absolute address zero point
(full-closed system).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(full-closed system).
#4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position 
detector is used 
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment is performed or after 
the absolute position detector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, power must be 
turned off and on, then manual reference position return must be performed. This


key: chroma:document
string_value:
completes the positional correspondence between the machine position and the position 
on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1 automatically.
#5 APCx Position detector
0: Other than absolute position detector
1: Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)
- Separate type Pulsecoder or linear scale is used
1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P]
Normally, the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set to the reference counter capacity.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
* When plural reference marks are on a linear scale, a quotient of the distance between the reference 
marks divided by an interfer may be used as a reference counter capacity:
(Example)
300mm ⇒ reference counter 30000
20000
15000
10000 etc
(1mm)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 488 -
8.5 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING
When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return, this function enables the tool to 
return the reference position that is set by MTB.
When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position once set remains also during power off. 
When the absolute detector is replaced or absolute 
position is lost, perform this setting.
Overview
Time
Speed
Reference position return
FL rate (PRM 1425)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FL rate (PRM 1425)
JOG
ZRN
+Ja
GRID
ZP a
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation
<1> Move the tool along an axis for setting the reference position in the reference position return 
direction in jog feed and position the tool near the reference position.
<2> Select the manual reference position return mode and set the feed axis and direction select signal (+ 
or – direction) for the axis for setting the reference position to 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<3> The tool is positioned at the nearest grid (electric grid based on the one-rotation signal of the
position detector) in the reference position return direction specified in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 
1006 from the current position. This position is set as the reference position.
<4> After the in-position status is confirmed, the reference position return completion signal (ZP1) and 
reference position establishment signal (ZRF1) are set to 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
* After the reference position has been set, select the reference position return mode (ZRN signal is 1) 
and turn on an axis-and-direction- select signal, then the tool returns to the reference position.
Parameter
There are the following related parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs 
0: Disabled
1: Enabled


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 489 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.
#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is:
0: + direction
1: - direction
8.6 ai SERVO WARNING INTERFACE
Overview
The ai servo system can report the warning status before one of the following target alarms occurs.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued.
For example, this signal can be used by the machine for retracting tools from the time a warning occurs 
by the time a servo alarm occurs.
Signal
Servo warning detail signals SVWRN1 to 4 <F093.4 to 7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports the warning signal corresponding to the state of the servo amplifier.
[Output condition] The following table shows the warning statuses of the servo amplifier and their


key: chroma:document
string_value:
corresponding warning signals.
Corresponding alarm messages
Warning status signals Time from when a 
warning state signal is 
issued to until an alarm 
occurs
SVWRN4
<F093.7>
SVWRN3
<F093.6>
SVWRN2
<F093.5>
SVWRN1
<F093.4>
SV0444 SV INTERNAL FAN 
FAILURE
1 0 0 0 One minute
SV0601 SV EXTERNAL FAN 
FAILURE
1 0 0 1 Until overheat occurs 
(inconstant)
SV0040 PS EXTERNAL INPUT
COMPONENT ERROR
1 0 1 1 One minute
SV0443 PS INTERNAL FAN 
FAILURE
1 1 0 0 One minute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FAILURE
1 1 0 0 One minute
SV0606 PS EXTERNAL FAN 
FAILURE
1 1 0 1 Until overheat occurs 
(inconstant)
SV0431 PS OVERLOAD 1 1 1 0 One minute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 490 - 
A timing chart for handling a warning is shown below. 
Occurrence and stop of the alarm corresponding to a warning
Occurrence of a warning
Servo amplifier
SVWRN1-4
(Warning)
PMC Perform deceleration stop or block stop
during this time period with the PMC to
stop the machine without damage. The
time period varies with the warning type.
Activation
Signal address 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
F093 SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1 SVS


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Warning status alarms for αi servo amplifiers 
When bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 0, if an αi servo amplifier is placed in the warning 
status, a DS alarm is output in addition to the servo warning detail signals. 
If one of the following alarms is issued, automatic operation enters the feed hold state and movements 
along all controlled axes including PMC axes are decelerated to a stop. Issuing a warning status alarm 
does not cause the servo motor to be deactivated. 
Alarm No. when


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Alarm No. when 
the servo 
amplifier is in the 
warning status 
Alarm No. when 
the servo 
amplifier is in the 
alarm status 
Alarm message Operation performed when the warning status 
occurs 
DS0608 SV0444 SV INTERNAL 
FAN FAILURE 
Immediately after the fan stops, DS0608 is displayed 
and movements along axes enter the feed hold stop 
state. The servo motor is kept active for 1 minute. 
After that, the servo motor is deactivated and 
SV0444 is displayed. 
DS0609 SV0601 SV EXTERNAL


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DS0609 SV0601 SV EXTERNAL 
FAN FAILURE 
Immediately after the fan stops, DS0609 is displayed 
and movements along axes enter the feed hold stop 
state. When bit 2 of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1 
after that, the alarm display can be canceled by a 
reset and operation can be restarted. 
DS0610 SV0443 PS INTERNAL 
FAN FAILURE 
Immediately after the fan stops, DS0610 is displayed 
and movements along axes enter the feed hold stop 
state. The servo motor is kept active for 1 minute.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
After that, the servo motor is deactivated and 
SV0443 is displayed. 
DS0611 SV0606 PS EXTERNAL 
FAN FAILURE 
Immediately after the fan stops, DS0611 is displayed 
and movements along axes enter the feed hold stop 
state. When bit 2 of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1 
after that, the alarm display can be canceled by a 
reset and operation can be restarted. 
DS0612 SV0431 PS OVERLOAD If the main circuit of the common power supply (PS) 
is overloaded, DS0612 is displayed and movements


key: chroma:document
string_value:
along axes enter the feed hold stop state. A certain 
period of time after that, the servo motor is 
deactivated and SV0441 is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 491 -
Alarm No. when 
the servo 
amplifier is in the 
warning status
Alarm No. when 
the servo 
amplifier is in the 
alarm status
Alarm message Operation performed when the warning status 
occurs
DS0613 SV0607 PS IMPROPER 
INPUT POWER
If the main power source for the common power 
supply (PS) becomes abnormal, DS0613 is 
displayed and movements along axes enter the feed 
hold stop state.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
hold stop state.
After an alarm in the warning status listed above is issued, when the ai servo amplifier is actually placed 
in the alarm status, the servo motor is deactivated and the number of an alarm in the alarm status is 
additionally displayed.
When bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1, if an ai servo amplifier is placed in the warning 
status, only the servo warning detail signals are output and no alarm in the warning status (alarm DS0608


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to DS0613) is issued. If a servo amplifier is placed in the warning status during automatic operation, 
automatic operation is kept. So, decelerate the movements along axes to a stop using the servo warning 
detail signals before the servo motor is deactivated. Note that if the movements along axes are not 
decelerated to a stop, the servo motor is suddenly deactivated during movement along axes.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1807 SWP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Data type] Bit path
#2 SWP This parameter specifies the operation of the ai series servo amplifier in its warning state 
(for example, with the fan stopped).
0: An alarm is issued when the amplifier is placed in the warning state. Automatic 
operation enters the feed hold state and the servo axis is decelerated to a stop.
1: An alarm is not issued even when the amplifier is placed in the warning state. 
Automatic operation is kept. The servo is deactivated if the amplifier shifts from the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 492 -
CAUTION
If operation is continued with the external fan stopped while bit 2 
(SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1, the servo amplifier may 
be overheated and "overheat alarm", "IPM alarm", or "VRDY off 
alarm" may be issued depending on the operating conditions. If 
such an alarm is issued, the amplifier is deactivated and the servo 
motor is stopped by the dynamic brake, involving a risk of breaking


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the workpiece or tool as the stop from high-speed rotation requires 
an extended distance. The user should therefore understand that 
the operation with bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 set to 1 is a 
temporary step to take before fan replacement. Once the fan has 
stopped, be sure to replace the fan immediately and set bit 2 
(SWP) of parameter No. 1807 back to 0.
If bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1, the warning text 
"FAN" blinks on the NC screen to show that the external fan has


key: chroma:document
string_value:
been stopped. Also on the machine side, monitor the warning signal 
output to the PMC and remind the operator of the operation with the 
fan stopped.
8.7 ai SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN
Overview
In the ai servo system, ID information output from each of the connected units is obtained and output to 
the CNC screen.
The units that have ID information are shown below.
(Note: Some instances of these units do not have ID information.)
- Servo motor
- Pulsecoder
- Servo amplifier(SV)
- Power supply(PS)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Power supply(PS)
ID information is automatically read from each of the connected units during first startup of the CNC and 
then recorded. Next time (and the subsequent time) the CNC is started, the ID information that can be 
read is compared with one recorded at the first startup time in order to monitor any change to the 
connected units. (If there is a difference between them, the alarm mark (*) appears.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The recorded ID information can be edited. Therefore, the ID information of an unit that does not have ID 
information can be displayed. (However, the alarm mark (*) indicating a difference between these IDs 
appears.)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11320 IDC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 493 -
#1 IDC The soft key [UPDATEALL ID], which updates ID information on the servo or spindle 
information screen as a batch, is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
NOTE
IDC is effective only if bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 is set to 
1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13112 SVI IDW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 IDW Editing on the servo or spindle information screen is:
0: Prohibited.
1: Not prohibited.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1: Not prohibited.
#1 SVI The servo information screen is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
Displaying the servo information screen
1 Press the function key, then press the [SYSTEM] soft key.
2 Press the [SERVO INFO] soft key to display the screen as shown below.
(*) Servo information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a difference between the ID information in 
screen and the actual ID information, the corresponding items are preceded by *.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DIGITAL SERVO B-64695EN/01
- 494 -
Additional Information
Even if replacement is performed reasonably such as for repairing, this function 
incorrectly indicates the * mark when it detects the replacement.
To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to update the registered data, as 
described in the editing section later.
(1) Make the registered data editable. (Bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 = 1)
(2) On the edit screen, place the cursor on the item from which you want to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
delete the * mark.
(3) Operate the soft keys [READ ID], [INPUT], and [SAVE] in that order.
To update all items and clear * marks at a time, press soft key [UPDATEALL ID] 
(displayed when bit 1 (IDC) of parameter No. 11320 is set to 1).
Editing the servo information screen
1 Assume that bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 = 1.
2 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator's panel.
3 Follow the steps shown in "Displaying the servo information screen" to display the screen as shown 
below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 8. DIGITAL SERVO
- 495 -
Screen operation
Mode Key operation Use
Viewing (*1) Page keys Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen basis.
Editing (*2) Soft keys
[INPUT] Replace the selected ID information at the cursor position with the 
character string in key-in buffer.
[READ ID] Transfers the ID information the connected device at the cursor has to 
the key-in buffer. Only the items preceded by * (*3) are valid.
[SAVE] Saves the ID information that has been changed on the servo


key: chroma:document
string_value:
information screen in flash ROM.
[RELOAD] Cancels the ID information that has been changed on the servo 
information screen and loads ID information from flash ROM.
[UPDATEALL ID]
(*4)
Updates the ID information for all axes that is output from each of the 
connected units displayed on the servo or spindle information screen at 
a time.
Page keys Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen basis.
Cursor keys Scrolls up or down the selection of ID information.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
*1 Viewing mode: when bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 = 0
*2 Editing mode: when bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 = 1
*3 If there is a difference between the ID information in screen and the actual ID information, the 
corresponding items are preceded by *.
*4 when bit 1 (IDC) of parameter No. 11320 = 1
NOTE
For axes that are not used by the ai servo system, ID information of connected 
units cannot be obtained.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. AC SPINDLE B-64695EN/01
- 496 -
9 AC SPINDLE
This chapter outlines the serial interface spindle amplifiers and explains related parameters.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 9. AC SPINDLE
- 497 -
9.1 SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE
9.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control
S command
Spindle
M command
NC PMC
M03, M04, M05, M19
FIN
*SSTP (Spindle stop)
SOVx (Spindle override)
SF, GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
(For milling machining)
GR1, GR2 (For lathe cutting)
SOR (Orientation)
R01O to R12O
R01I to R12I
SIND
SGN (0=+, 1=-)
SSIN
*ESP, MRDY,
SFR, SRV, ORCM etc.
SST, SDT, SAR, LDT1, LDT2
ORAR, ALM etc.
Motor speed
S
(Parameters Nos. 3735 to 
3752) 0
1
0
0
1
1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3752) 0
1
0
0
1
1
Orientation speed
(bit 1 (ESF) of parameter No.3705, 
parameter No.3732, and bit 5 
(ORM) of parameter No.3706)
Output polarity (Bits 7 (CWM) and 
6 (TCW) of parameter No.3706)
Communication
function
Communication cable
Serial spindle 
amplifier Communication
function
Operator's panel
Load meter
Spindle 
motor
Speedometer
PC
LM
SM


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. AC SPINDLE B-64695EN/01
- 498 -
9.1.1.1 Method A of gear change for machining center system
(bit 2 (SGB) of Parameter No.3705 = 0)
S code
(min-1
)
Output Motor speed
4095
0
Max
Parameter 
No.3736
Parameter 
No.3735
Gear 1
Gear 2 Gear 3
0 Parameter 
No.3741
Parameter 
No.3742
Parameter 
No.3743
9.1.1.2 Method B of gear change for machining center system
(bit 2 (SGB) of Parameter No.3705 = 1)
0
Output Motor speed
4095
0
Max
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
Parameter 
No.3736


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter 
No.3736
Parameter 
No.3752
Parameter 
No.3751
Parameter 
No.3735
S code
(min-1
) Parameter 
No.3741
Parameter 
No.3742
Parameter 
No.3743
9.1.1.3 Lathe system
0
0
Output Motor speed
4095
0
Max
S code
(min-1
)
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
Gear 4
Parameter 
No.3741
Parameter 
No.3742
Parameter 
No.3743
Parameter 
No.3744


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 9. AC SPINDLE
- 499 -
9.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen
9.1.2.1 Display method
(1) Confirm the parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SPS
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 SPS 0: The spindle tuning screen is not displayed.
1: The spindle tuning screen is displayed.
(2) Press the function key to select the screen for setting parameters and other data.
(3) Press the continuous menu key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(4) Press the soft key [SP.PRM]. Then, the spindle setting and tuning screen appears.
(5) The following screens are provided. These screens can be selected using soft keys.
<1> [SP.SET] : Spindle setting screen
<2> [SP.TUN] : Spindle tuning screen
<3> [SP.MON] : Spindle monitor screen
(6) With the page keys , a spindle to be displayed can be selected (only when multiple 
serial spindles are connected).
9.1.2.2 Spindle setting screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. AC SPINDLE B-64695EN/01
- 500 -
- Gear selection
The gear select status on the machine side is displayed.
Indication CTH1 CTH2
1 0 0
2 0 1
3 1 0
4 1 1
- Spindle
Select a spindle for which data is to be set.
S11 : Main spindle amplifier for the 1st spindle 
S12 : Subspindle amplifier for the 1st spindle 
S21 : Main spindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle 
S22 : Subspindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Switching between the main spindle and the subspindle is performed by spindle switching control. 
Spindle switching control is the function for driving two spindle motors with one spindle amplifier. For 
details, refer to the following manual.
Refer to the section related to “Spindle Switching Control” in the FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi /βi
series, FANUC BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN).
- Parameters
S11: 
1st Main
S12:
1st Sub
S21:
2nd Main
S22:
2nd Sub


key: chroma:document
string_value:
S21:
2nd Main
S22:
2nd Sub
Gear ratio (HIGH) 4056 4216 4056 4216 Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH) 4057 4057
Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW) 4058 4217 4058 4217 Gear ratio (LOW) 4059 4059
Max. spindle speed (gear1) 3741 3741
Max. spindle speed (gear2) 3742 3742
Max. spindle speed (gear3) 3743 3743
Max. spindle speed (gear4) 3744 3744
Max. motor speed 4020 4196 4020 4196
Max. C axis speed 4021 None 4021 None


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 9. AC SPINDLE
- 501 -
9.1.2.3 Spindle tuning screen
- Operation mode
1 : SPEED CONTROL
2 : SPINDLE ORIENTATION
3 : SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL
4 : RIGID TAPPING
5 : SP.CONTOURING CONTROL
6 : SP.POSITIONING CONTROL
- Gear selection
- Spindle
The descriptions of these two items are the same as those for the spindle setting screen.
- Displayed parameters
The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode.
Spindle 
positioning 
control
Normal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
positioning 
control
Normal 
operation Orientation Synchronizatio
n control Rigid tapping Cs contour 
control
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Loop gain
Motor voltage
ZRN gain (%)
Shift reference 
position
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Motor voltage
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Loop gain
Motor voltage
ORAR gain (%)
Shift spindle 
stop position
Shift reference 
position
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Loop gain
Motor voltage
Acceleration/ 
deceleration 
constant (%)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
deceleration 
constant (%)
Shift reference 
position
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Loop gain
Motor voltage
ZRN gain 
Shift reference 
position
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Gain OVR (%)
Loop gain
Motor voltage
ZRN gain (%)
Shift reference 
position
*1) For the parameter numbers corresponding to the displayed parameter items, see Section 
“Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle tuning screen”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. AC SPINDLE B-64695EN/01
- 502 -
- Displayed monitoring items
The displayed monitoring items vary depending on the operation mode.
Spindle 
positioning 
control
Normal 
operation Orientation Synchronizatio
n control Rigid tapping Cs contour 
control
Motor speed
Feedrate
Position 
deviation S
Motor speed
Spindle speed
Motor speed
Spindle speed
Position 
deviation S
Motor speed
Spindle speed
Position 
deviation S1
Position 
deviation S2
Synchronous 
deviation
Motor speed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
deviation
Motor speed
Spindle speed
Position 
deviation S
Position 
deviation Z
Synchronous 
deviation
Motor speed
Spindle speed
Position 
deviation S
*1)
Motor speed [min-1
] = |Spindle data| × Max. motor speed (*) 16383
(*) Parameter No. 4020: Main spindle Parameter No. 4196: Subspindle
9.1.2.4 Spindle monitor screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 9. AC SPINDLE
- 503 -
- Spindle alarm
9001:MOTOR OVERHEAT 9058:PS OVERLOAD 9132:SER.SENSOR DATA ERROR
9002:EX DEVIATION SPEED 9059:PS INTERNAL FAN FAILURE 9133:SER.SENSOR TRANSFER ERROR
9003:DC-LINK FUSE IS BROKEN 9061:SEMI-FULL ERROR EXCESS 9134:SER.SENSOR SOFT PHASE 
ERROR
9004:PS IMPROPER INPUT POWER 9065:SERIAL SPINDLE ALARM 9135:SAFETY SPEED ZERO ERROR(SP)
9006:THERMAL SENSOR DISCONNECT 9066:COM. ERROR BETWEEN SP AMPS 9136:MISMATCH RESULT OF SAFETY 
SPEED ZERO CHECK(SP)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SPEED ZERO CHECK(SP)
9007:OVER SPEED 9067:FSC/EGB COMMAND ERROR 9137:SP DEVICE COMMUNICATION 
ERROR
9009:OVERHEAT MAIN CIRCUIT 9068:ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER 9139:SER.SENSOR PULSE MISS
9011:PS OVER VOLT. DC LINK 9069:SAFETY SPEED OVER 9140:SER.SENSOR COUNT MISS
9012:OVERCURRENT POWER CIRCUIT 9070:ILLEGAL AXIS DATA 9141:SER.SENSOR NO 1-ROT SIGNAL
9013:CPU DATA MEMORY FAULT 9071:SAFETY PARAMETER ERROR 9142:SER.SENSOR ABNORMAL
9014:SOFTWARE SERIES MISMATCH 9072:MISMATCH RESULT OF MOTOR


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SPEED CHECK 9143:CS HIGH SPEED CHANGE CMD 
ERROR
9015:SPINDLE SWITCHING FAULT 9073:MOTOR SENSOR DISCONNECTED 9144:CURRENT DETECT CIRCUIT 
ERROR
9016:RAM ERROR 9074:CPU TEST ERROR 9145:LOW VOLTAGE DRIVER
9017:ID NUMBER PARITY ERROR 9075:CRC ERROR 9146:SP:INTERNAL OVERHEAT
9018:SUMCHECK ERROR PROGRAM 
ROM 9076:INEXECUTION OF SAFETY 
FUNCTIONS 9148:AXIS NUMBER NOT SET
9019:EXCESS OFFSET CURRENT U 9077:MISMATCH RESULT OF AXIS 
NUMBER CHECK 9149:EXT. CURRENT FB U-OFFST


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9020:EXCESS OFFSET CURRENT V 9078:MISMATCH RESULT OF SAFETY 
PARAMETER CHECK 9150:EXT. CURRENT FB V-OFFST
9021:POS SENSOR POLARITY ERROR 9079:INITIAL TEST ERROR 9151:FILTER MODULE ERROR
9022:SP AMP OVER CURRENT 9080:ALARM AT THE OTHER SP AMP. 9152:EXT. CUR. FB DISCONNECT
9024:SERIAL TRANSFER ERROR 9081:1-ROT MOTOR SENSOR ERROR 9153:SP NO FAILURE
9027:DISCONNECT POSITION CODER 9082:NO 1-ROT MOTOR SENSOR 9154:PHASE OPEN
9029:OVERLOAD 9083:MOTOR SENSOR SIGNAL ERROR 9155:FAILURE OF SP (OPEN)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9030:OVERCURRENT 9084:SPNDL SENSOR DISCONNECTED 9156:FAILURE OF CURRENT CTRL.
9031:MOTOR LOCK 9085:1-ROT SPNDL SENSOR ERROR 9157:FAILURE OF SP (SHORT)
9032:SIC-LSI RAM FAULT 9086:NO 1-ROT SPNDL SENSOR 9159:MISMATCHED FUNCTION CODE
9033:PS PRE-CHARGE FAILURE 9087:SPNDL SENSOR SIGNAL ERROR 9160:THERMISTOR DISCONNECTION
9034:ILLEGAL PARAMETER 9088:COOLING RADI FAN FAILURE 9161:POW. CABLE SHORT CIRCUIT
9036:OVERFLOW ERROR COUNTER 9089:SUB MODULE SM (SSM) ERROR 9162:DELAY OF SP POS. DATA


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9037:ILLEGAL SETTING VELOCITY 
DETECTOR 9090:UNEXPECTED ROTATION 9163: ILLEGAL SP POS. DATA
9041:ILLEGAL 1REV SIGN OF 
POSITION CODER 9091:POLE POSITION COUNT MISS 9164: FAILURE OF MASTER SENSOR
9042:NO 1REV SIGN OF POSITION 
CODER 9092:OVER SPEED TO VELOCITY 
COMMAND 9165: CONTROL METHOD CHANGED
9043:DISCONNECT POSITION CODER 
DEF. SPEED 9110:AMP COMMUNICATION ERROR 9167: FAILURE OF SP CONTROL 
SEQUENCE
9046:ILLEGAL 1REV SIGN OF SCREW 
CUT 9111:PS LOW VOLT. CONTROL 9204:PS SOFT THERMAL


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9047:ILLEGAL SIGNAL OF POSITION 
CODER 9112:PS EXCESS-REGENERATION1 9211:PS ILLEGAL PARAMETER
9049:DEF. SPEED IS OVER VALUE 9113:PS EXTERNAL FAN FAILURE 9212:PS HARDWARE ERROR
9050:SYNCRONOUS VALUE IS OVER 
SPEED 9120:COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR 9213:PS EXTERNAL INPUT 
COMPONENT ERROR
9051:PS LOW VOLT. DC LINK 9121:COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR 9214:PS PFB-R ERROR
9052:ITP FAULT 1 9122:COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR 9215:PS PFB-C ERROR
9053:ITP FAULT 2 9123:SPINDLE SWITCH CIRCUIT ERROR 9216:PS SUB MODULE ERROR


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9054:OVERCURRENT 9128:SP SYNC VELOCITY ERROR 
EXCESS
9055:ILLEGAL POWER LINE 9129:SP SYNC POSITION ERROR 
EXCESS
9056:COOLING FAN FAILURE 9130:TORQUE TANDEM POLARITY 
ERROR
9057:PS EXCESS-REGENERATION2 9131:SPINDLE TUNING FUNCTION 
ALARM


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. AC SPINDLE B-64695EN/01
- 504 -
- Operation
Following 6 modes are available:
a. Normal operation
b. Orientation
c. Synchronous operation
d. Rigid tapping
e. Cs contour control
f. Spindle positioning control
- Load meter
The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%.
Load meter [%] = Load meter data
× Max. output value of load meter (*) 32767
(*) Parameter No. 4127: High-speed winding of main spindle
Parameter No. 4274: High-speed winding of subspindle


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 4093: Low-speed winding of main spindle
Parameter No. 4279: Low-speed winding of subspindle
- Control input signal
Max.10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
TLML
TLMH
CTH1
CTH2
SRV
SFR
ORCM
MRDY
ARST
*ESP
Torque limit command (low)
Torque limit command (high)
Gear signal 1
Gear signal 2
Spindle reverse rotation
Spindle forward rotation
Spindle orientation
Machine ready
Alarm reset signal
Emergency stop
SPSL
MCFN
SOCN
RSL
RCH
INDX
ROTA


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SOCN
RSL
RCH
INDX
ROTA
NRRO
INTG
DEFM
Spindle selection signal
Power line switching
Soft start/stop signal
Output switching request
Power line state confirm
Orientation stop pos. change
Rotation direction of ORCM
Short-cut of ORCM
Speed integral control signal
Differential mode command
- Control output signals
Max. 10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
ALM
SST
SDT
SAR
LDT1
LDT2
Alarm signal
Speed zero signal
Speed detecting signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Speed detecting signal
Speed arrival signal
Load detecting signal 1
Load detecting signal 2
TLM5
ORAR
CHP
CFIN
RCHP
RCFN
Torque limitation
Orientation end signal
Power line switched signal
Spindle switch complete
Output switch signal
Output switch complete signal
9.1.2.5 Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on 
spindle tuning screen
- Normal operation mode
S11:
1st Main
S12:
1st Sub
S21:
2nd Main
S22:
2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4040 4206 4040 4206


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Proportional gain (LOW) 4041 4207 4041 4207
Integral gain (HIGH) 4048 4212 4048 4212 Integral gain (LOW) 4049 4049
Motor voltage 4083 4236 4083 4236


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 9. AC SPINDLE
- 505 -
- Orientation mode
S11:
1st Main
S12:
1st Sub
S21:
2nd Main
S22:
2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4042 4208 4042 4208
Proportional gain (LOW) 4043 4209 4043 4209
Integral gain (HIGH) 4050 4213 4050 4213 Integral gain (LOW) 4051 4051
Loop gain (HIGH) 4060 4218 4060 4218 Loop gain (MED.HIGH) 4061 4061
Loop gain (MED.LOW) 4062 4219 4062 4219 Loop gain (LOW) 4063 4063
Motor voltage 4084 4237 4084 4237


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Gain change upon completion of orientation 4064 4220 4064 4220
Stop position shift 4077 4228 4077 4228
PC-type orientation stop position 4031 4204 4031 4204
- Synchronization control mode
S11: 
1st Main
S12:
1st Sub
S21:
2nd Main
S22:
2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210
Proportional gain (LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
Integral gain (HIGH) 4052 4214 4052 4214 Integral gain (LOW) 4053 4053
Loop gain (HIGH) 4065 4221 4065 4221 Loop gain (MED.HIGH) 4066 4066


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Loop gain (MED.LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222 Loop gain (LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
Acc./Dec. time constant 4032 4032
Shift amount 4034 4034
- Rigid tapping mode
S11: 
1st Main
S12:
1st Sub
S21:
2nd Main
S22:
2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210
Proportional gain (LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
Integral gain (HIGH) 4052 4214 4052 4214 Integral gain (LOW) 4053 4053
Loop gain (HIGH) 4065 4221 4065 4221 Loop gain (MED.HIGH) 4066 4066


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Loop gain (MED.LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222 Loop gain (LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Grid shift amount at servo mode 4073 4223 4073 4223
- Cs contour control mode
S11: 
1st Main
S12:
1st Sub
S21:
2nd Main
S22:
2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4046 4046
Proportional gain (LOW) 4047 4047
Integral gain (HIGH) 4054 4054
Integral gain (LOW) 4055 4055
Gain OVR % 4342 4342


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. AC SPINDLE B-64695EN/01
- 506 -
S11: 
1st Main
S12:
1st Sub
S21:
2nd Main
S22:
2nd Sub
Loop gain (HIGH) 4069 4069
Loop gain (MED.HIGH) 4070 4070
Loop gain (MED.LOW) 4071 4071
Loop gain (LOW) 4072 4072
Motor voltage 4086 4086
ZRN gain % 4092 4092
Reference position shift 4135 4135
- Spindle positioning control mode
S11: 
1st Main
S12:
1st Sub
S21:
2nd Main
S22:
2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210
Proportional gain (LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Integral gain (HIGH) 4052 4214 4052 4214 Integral gain (LOW) 4053 4053
Loop gain (HIGH) 4065 4221 4065 4221 Loop gain (MED.HIG) 4066 4066
Loop gain (MED.LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222 Loop gain (LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Reference position shift 4073 4223 4073 4223
9.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters
The standard parameters related to each motor model can be set automatically.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
* The specifications for controlling a motor depend on the specifications defined by the machine tool 
builder. The parameters defined by the machine tool builder are set as the standard values (initial 
values) by this automatic setting function. Therefore, when performing automatic operation, always 
set parameters properly according to the parameter list (parameters 4000 and later).
1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2 Set bit 7 of parameter 4019 to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4019 LDSP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle
#7 LDSP The parameters for the serial interface spindle are:
0: Not set automatically.
1: Set automatically.
3 Set a motor model code.
4133 Motor model code
*1) As for the individual model code, refer to the FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR PARAMETER 
MANUAL B-65280EN.
4 Turn off the power then back on. Then, the parameters are read.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 9. AC SPINDLE
- 507 -
9.1.4 Warning Interface
Overview
The warning state can be reported before an alarm is issued. When the warning state is entered, a report to 
the PMC is sent.
For example, this signal can be used for retracting tools or reducing cutting load from the time a warning 
occurs by the time an overheat alarm occurs. In addition, the warning number is displayed also on the 
diagnosis screen.
Signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
diagnosis screen.
Signal
Spindle warning detailed signals SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 <F264.0 to .7, F265.0>
[Classification] Output
[Function] Reports the warning number corresponding to the state of the αi spindle amplifier.
[Output condition] When the αi spindle is in the warning state, a warning number consisting of SPWRN1 to 
SPWRN9 is output as nine-bit binary data.
If warnings occurred on multiple αi spindle amplifiers, the warning number of the αi
spindle having the smallest axis number is output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The warning numbers and their descriptions are shown below.
Warning 
number Contents Details
01 MOTOR OVERHEAT When the motor temperature increases beyond the overheat warning 
detection level (set by a parameter), a warning signal is output. At 
this time, spindle operation is continued. So, perform necessary 
processing with the PMC.
An alarm is issued when the motor temperature has reached the 
overheat alarm detection level.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
56 COOLING FAN FAILURE If the internal fan stops, the warning signal is output. Since the 
spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform 
processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.
58 PS OVERLOAD If the main circuit of the Power Supply (PS) is overloaded, the 
warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at 
this time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
An alarm is issued when a certain period of time elapses after 
warning signal output.
59 PS INTERNAL FAN 
FAILURE
If the Power Supply (PS) cooling fan stops, the warning signal is 
output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the 
PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.
88 COOLING RADI FAN 
FAILURE
If the radiator cooling fan stops, the warning signal is output. Since


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform 
processing as needed.
If the main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.
113 PS EXTERNAL FAN 
FAILURE
If the Power Supply (PS) radiator cooling fan stops, the warning 
signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, 
use the PMC to perform processing as needed.
If the Power Supply (PS) main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.
213 PS EXTERNAL INPUT 
COMPONENT ERROR


key: chroma:document
string_value:
COMPONENT ERROR
If the power transformer or input filter is overloaded, the warning 
signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, 
use the PMC to perform processing as needed.
An alarm is issued when a certain period of time elapses after 
warning signal output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. AC SPINDLE B-64695EN/01
- 508 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1
F265 SPWRN9
Diagnosis screen
The status of a warning is displayed on the following diagnostic screen.
712 Warning status of spindle
[Data type] Word spindle
The number of a warning caused on each spindle is indicated.
If there is no warning, 0 is indicated.
9.1.5 Spindle Information Screen
Overview


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Overview
In the αi spindle system, ID information output from each of the connected units is obtained and output to 
the CNC screen.
The units that have ID information are shown below.
(Note: Some instances of these units do not have ID information.)
• Spindle amplifier (SP)
• Power Supply (PS)
The ID information recorded during first startup can be compared with the ID information read this time 
on the screen to check whether the configuration of the connected units is changed. (If there is a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
difference between them, the alarm mark (*) appears.)
The recorded ID information can be edited. Therefore, the ID information of an unit that does not have ID 
information can be displayed. (However, the alarm mark (*) indicating a difference between these IDs 
appears.)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11320 IDC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 IDC The soft key [UPDATEALL ID], which updates ID information on the servo or spindle 
information screen as a batch, is:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
NOTE
IDC is effective only if bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 is set to 
1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 9. AC SPINDLE
- 509 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13112 SPI IDW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 IDW Editing on the servo or spindle information screen is:
0: Prohibited.
1: Not prohibited.
#2 SPI The servo information screen is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
Displaying the spindle information screen
1 Press the function key, then press the [SYSTEM] soft key.
2 Press the [SPINDLE INFO] soft key to display the screen as shown below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig.9.1.5 (a) Displaying the spindle information screen
(*1) Spindle information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a difference between the ID information 
in screen and the actual ID information, the corresponding items are preceded by *.
(*2) The specification and serial number of spindle motor are not automatically read.to be input. For 
easy maintenace, FANUC recommend to input the information of each motor (The method is 
described later).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. AC SPINDLE B-64695EN/01
- 510 -
- Spindle switch control
When spindle switch control is used, the ID information of the subspindle is also displayed.
Fig.9.1.5 (b) Spindle switch control
Additional Information
Even if replacement is performed reasonably such as for repairing, this function 
incorrectly indicates the * mark when it detects the replacement.
To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to update the registered data, as 
described in the editing section later.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1) Make the registered data editable. (Bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 = 1)
(2) On the edit screen, place the cursor on the item from which you want to 
delete the * mark.
(3) Operate the soft keys [READ ID], [INPUT], and [SAVE] in that order.
To updata all items and clear * marks at a time, press soft key [UPDATEALL ID] 
(displayed when bit 1 (IDC) of parameter No. 11320 is set to 1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 9. AC SPINDLE
- 511 -
Editing the spindle information screen
1 Assume that bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 = 1.
2 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator's panel.
3 Follow the steps shown in "Displaying the spindle information screen" to display the screen as 
shown below.
Fig.9.1.5 (c) Editing the spindle information screen
4 To move key-in buffer on the screen, use the page keys and .
Screen operation on the editing screen
Table9.1.5 (a) Operation list


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table9.1.5 (a) Operation list
Mode Key operation Use
Viewing (*1) Page keys Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen basis.
Editing (*2) Soft keys
[INPUT] Replace the selected ID information at the cursor position with the 
character string in key-in buffer.
[READ ID] Transfers the ID information the connected device at the cursor 
has to the key-in buffer. Only the items preceded by * (*3) are 
valid.
[SAVE] Saves the ID information that has been changed on the spindle


key: chroma:document
string_value:
information screen in flash ROM.
[RELOAD] Cancels the ID information that has been changed on the spindle 
information screen and loads ID information from flash ROM.
[UPDATEALL ID] (*4) Updates the ID information for all axes that is output from each of 
the connected units displayed on the servo or spindle information 
screen at a time.
Page keys Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen basis.
Cursor keys Scrolls up or down the selection of ID information.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
*1 Viewing mode: when bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 = 0
*2 Editing mode: when bit 0 (IDW) of parameter No. 13112 = 1
*3 Spindle information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a difference between the ID information in 
screen and the actual ID information, the corresponding items are preceded by *.
*4 when bit 1 (IDC) of parameter No. 11320 = 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 513 - 
10 TROUBLESHOOTING 
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure. 
10.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES 
When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind of failure occurred and take appropriate 
action, to promptly recover the machine. 
Check for the failure according to the following procedure : 
Appropriate action
When? With what operation? What failure?
↓
Recovery
Grasp the kind of failure
↓


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Grasp the kind of failure
↓
10.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred 
(1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences) 
(2) With what operation 
(3) What failure occurred 
If the alarm issued is a system alarm, obtain system alarm information while referencing the descriptions in Section 
10.24. 
1 When did the failure occur? 
• Date and time? 
• Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?) 
• Occurred when the power was turned on?


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other disturbances to the power supply? 
 How many times has it occurred 
• Only once? 
• Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day, or per month?) 
2 With what operation did it occur ? 
• What was the NC mode when the failure occurred? 
 Jog mode/memory operation mode /MDI mode /reference position return mode 
• If during program operation, 
- Where in the program ? 
- Which program No. and sequence No. ? 
- What program ?


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- What program ? 
- Occurred during axial movement ? 
- Occurred during the execution of an M/S/T code ? 
- Failure specific to the program ? 
• Does the same operation cause the same failure ? 
 (Check the repeatability of the failure.) 
• Occurred during data input/output ?


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 514 - 
<Feed axes and spindles> 
• For a failure related to feed axis servo 
(1) Occurred at both low feedrate and high feedrate ? 
(2) Occurred only for a certain axis ? 
• For a failure related to spindles 
 When did the failure occur ? (during power-on, acceleration, deceleration, or constant rotation) 
3 What failure occurred ? 
• Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen?


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred for alarms SV alarms, OT alarms, or SP 
alarms.) 
• Is the screen correct ? 
• If machining dimensions are incorrect 
(1) How large is the error ? 
(2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ? 
(3) Are the offsets correct ? 
4 Other information 
• Is there noise origin around machine? 
 If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be external noise to the power supply 
or inductive noise on machinery cables.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Operate other machines connected to the same power line and see if noise come from the relays 
or compressors. 
• Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side? 
 See Section 2.8, “CAUTIONS RELATED TO GROUNDING AND NOISE”. 
• Check the following for the input power supply voltage : 
(1) Is there variation in the voltage ? 
(2) Are the voltages different depending on the phase ? 
(3) Is the standard voltage supplied ? 
• How high is the ambient temperature of the control unit?


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Refer to manual about noise. 
• Has excessive vibration been applied to the control unit? 
5 When you contact our service center, specify the following items : 
(1) Name of the NC unit 
(2) Name of the machine tool builder and type of machine 
(3) Software series/version of the NC 
(4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and motor 
 (for a failure related to the servo) 
(5) Specifications of the spindle amplifier and spindle motor 
 (for a failure related to a spindle)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• See the drawing issued by the machine tool builder for the locations of the NC unit and 
servo/spindle amplifiers. 
• We use the following specification codes : 
 Servo /spindle amplifier : A06B-xxxx-Hxxx 
 Servo/spindle amplifier : A06B-xxxx-Bxxx 
NOTE 
 The mark ‘x’ represents a number.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 515 - 
10.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION 
CAN BE EXECUTED 
Points 
(1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic operation is done 
(2) Check whether position display shows correct position 
(3) Check CNC status display 
(4) Check CNC internal status using diagnosis function 
Causes and Countermeasures 
1 Position display (relative, absolute, machine coordinate) does not change


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1) Check CNC status display (Refer to Section, “CNC STATUS DISPLAY” for detail.) 
(a) Emergency stop status (Emergency stop signal is turned on) 
 If status display shows EMG the emergency stop signal is input. Check the following signal 
using the PMC's diagnosis function (PMCDGN). 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
X0008 *ESP 
G0008 *ESP 
 *ESP : ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input. 
(b) It is a reset status


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(b) It is a reset status 
 When RESET is displayed, any of a reset is functioned. Check the following signal using the 
PMC's diagnosis function (PMCDGN). 
(i) An input signal from the PMC functions 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0008 ERS RRW 
 ERS : When ERS is 1, external reset signal is input. 
 RRW : When RRW is 1, reset & rewind signal is input. 
(ii) RESET key on the MDI unit functions 
 When the signals in 1) are 0, <RESET> key may be functioning. Check the contact of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<RESET> key using a tester. 
 When it is abnormal, change the MDI unit. 
(c) Confirm the status of modes 
 Operation mode status is displayed on the lower part of screen as follows : 
 If nothing is displayed, mode select signal is not input. Check mode select signal using PMC's 
diagnosis function (PMCDGN). 
 For details, refer to section, “CNC STATUS DISPLAY”. 
(Example of display) 
 JOG : Manual operation (JOG) mode 
 HND : Manual handle (MPG) mode 
 MDI : Manual data input (MDI) mode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 516 - 
 <Mode select signal> 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1 
 ↓ ↓ ↓
 Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1 
 Manual handle (MPG) mode 1 0 0 
 Manual data input (MDI) mode 0 0 0 
 Automatic operation (Memory) mode 0 0 1 
 EDIT (Memory edit) mode 0 1 1 
(2) Check CNC diagnosis data No. 0000, 1010. Check the items for which 1 is displayed at right side. 
* Items with (a) to (d) relate with manual and automatic operation and its detail is shown below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(a) In-position check is being done 
 It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the following diagnosis data. (It is 1 in 
the following condition) 
 DGN0300 Position Error > PARAM1826 In-position width 
(i) Check the parameters according to the parameter list. 
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000) 
(b) Jog feedrate override is 0% 
 Check the signals using the PMC's signal status screen. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8 
 When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes 
1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . 0000. 
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override 
1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00% 
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01% 
: : 
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00% 
: : 
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34% 
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 517 - 
(c) Interlock or start lock signal is input 
 There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal is used by the machine 
tool builder at the parameters shown below. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
3003 ITX ITL 
 #0 (ITL) ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1) 
 #2 (ITX) ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2) 
 Check state of effective interlock signals using the PMC's signal status screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(i) Interlock signals (*IT, *CSL, and *BSL) are input. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0008 *BSL *CSL *IT 
 *IT=0, *CSL=0, and *BSL=0 show that interlock signal is input. 
(ii) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 
 *ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input. 
(d) The NC is in the reset state. 
 In this state, "RESET" is display as the state indication of the previous item 1-(1)-(b). So, not


key: chroma:document
string_value:
only manual operation but also all automatic operations are disabled. So, referring to the 
previous item 1-(1)-(b), make an investigation. 
(e) The address to which an axis signal is assigned is incorrect. 
 The relationship between each CNC axis and PMC interface address is set in a parameter. 
Check the setting of the following parameter: 
3021 Address to which an axis signal is assigned 
2 When machine coordinate value does not update on position display 
Machine lock signal (MLK) is input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0044 MLK 
G0108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 
 MLK : All axes machine lock 
 MLKn : Each axis machine lock 
When the signal is 1, the corresponding machine lock signal is input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 518 - 
10.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE 
Points 
(1) Check whether position display is operating. 
(2) Check CNC status display. 
(3) Check internal status using Diagnostic function. 
Causes and Countermeasures 
1 Position display (relative, absolute, machine coordinate) does not change 
(1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not selected). 
 When status display shows JOG, it is normal.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When status display does not show JOG, mode select signal is not selected correctly. Confirm the 
mode select signal using the PMC's signal status screen. 
 <Mode select signal> 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1 
 ↓ ↓ ↓
 Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1 
(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the signal using the PMC's signal status 
screen. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 
G0102 -J8 -J7 -J6 -J5 -J4 -J3 -J2 -J1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When a bit is "1", the corresponding feed axis direction selection signal has been entered. 
1 : Feed along the 1st axis 
: 
8 : Feed along the 8th axis 
+ : Feed in the + direction 
- : Feed in the - direction 
+ J
Example) 
 In the normal state, pressing the "+X" button on the operator's panel causes the signal +Jn to be 
displayed as "1". 
* This signal becomes effective when the rise of the signal is detected. If, therefore, the direction


key: chroma:document
string_value:
selection signal has been entered before jog mode selection, axis movement is not performed; 
set the bit "0" and then re-check the signal.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 519 - 
(3) Check CNC diagnosis data No. 0000, 1010. Check the items for which 1 is displayed at right side. 
* Items with (a) to (d) relate with manual and automatic operation and its detail is shown below. 
(a) In-position check is being done 
 It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the following diagnosis data. (It is 1 in 
the following condition) 
 DGN0300 Position Error>Parameter No.1826 In-position width


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(i) Check the parameters according to the parameter list. 
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000) 
(b) Jog feedrate override is 0% 
 Check the signals using the PMC's signal status screen. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0 
G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8 
 When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes 
1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . 0000. 
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override 
1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00% 
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01% 
: : 
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00% 
: : 
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34% 
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00% 
(c) Interlock or start lock signal is input 
 There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal is used by the machine 
tool builder at the parameters shown below. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
3003 ITX ITL 
 #0 (ITL) ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#2 (ITX) ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2) 
 Check state of effective interlock signals using the PMC's signal status screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 520 - 
(i) Interlock signal (*IT) is input. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0008 *IT 
 *IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input. 
(ii) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 
 *ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input. 
(d) NC is in a reset state 
 In this state, not only manual operation but also automatic operation is disabled. Make an


key: chroma:document
string_value:
investigation according to the Section, "Manual Operation and Automatic Operation are 
Disabled." 
(4) Jog feed rate setting (Parameter) is not correct. 
1423 Jog feedrate per axis 
(5) Manual feed per revolution is selected 
 This function feeds an axis synchronized with spindle rotation and whether this function is used or 
not is selected by the following parameter: 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
1402 JRV 
 JRV Jog feed and incremental feed are : 
0 : Of feed per minute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0 : Of feed per minute 
1 : Of feed per revolution 
(a) When parameter JRV is set to 1, feed rate of the axis is calculated by synchronizing with 
rotation of the spindle. Therefore, rotate the spindle. 
(b) If the axis does not move even when the spindle is rotated, check the detector of the spindle 
(position coder) and the cable between the position coder and the CNC if it is short-circuited or 
ungrounded. 
(6) The specified axis is the index table indexing axis. <machining center system only>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For the index table indexing axis (B-axis), jog feed, incremental feed, and manual handle feed 
cannot be performed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 521 - 
10.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE 
Points 
If manual handle operation cannot be performed, the probable causes include the following: 
• The servo is not activated. 
• Manual pulse generators are not connected properly to the I/O module. 
• The I/O Link i of the I/O module is not allocated, or is not allocated properly. 
• A related input signal is not input due to a parameter setting error.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Also use CNC diagnosis functions to check the internal status. 
Causes and Countermeasures 
1 The servo is not activated 
Check that the LED on the servo amplifier indicates "0". If a number other than "0" is indicated, the servo 
is not activated. In this state, even JOG operation and automatic operation cannot be operated. 
Check the servo-related parameters and the wiring. 
2 Checking the manual pulse generators 
(1) Cable failures (such as breaks)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Examine the cables for faults such as breaks and short-circuits, referring to the figure below. 
CNC 
(Main board) 
Distributed I/O module 
Operator's panel I/O module
IOLINK
(JD51A)
#1 
#2 
#3 
First manual pulse 
generator 
Second manual 
pulse generator 
Third manual pulse 
generator 
JD1B 
JA3
CNC 
(Main board) 
JD51A 
Distributed I/O module 
Operator's panel I/O module 
JD1B JA3 
Manual pulse 
generators Shield Shield 
SIN(01)
*SIN(02)
SOUT(03)
*SOUT(04)
0V(11)
0V(12)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
*SOUT(04)
0V(11)
0V(12)
0V(13)
0V(14)
HA1(01)
HB1(02)
+5V(09)
0V(12)
HA2(03)
HB2(04)
+5V(18)
(03)SOUT 
(04)*SOUT 
(01)SIN 
(02)*SIN 
(11)0V 
(12)0V 
(13)0V 
(14)0V 
HA1 
HB1 
+5V 
0V 
HA2 
HB2 
+5V 
0V 
HA3 
HB3 
+5V
0V 
0V(14)
HA3(05)
HB3(06)
+5V(20)
0V(16)
First 
Second 
Third


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 522 - 
(2) Manual pulse generator failures 
When rotated, a manual pulse generator generates the signals shown below. 
Using an oscilloscope, measure the signals from the screw terminal block located at the rear of a manual 
pulse generator. If no signals are output, measure the +5 V voltage. 
Screw terminal
block
Rear of a manual pulse generator
HA: Manual pulse generator phase A signal
HB: Manual pulse generator phase B signal
+5V 0V HA HB


key: chroma:document
string_value:
+5V 0V HA HB
When rotated in the plus direction When rotated in the minus direction
1 : 1
HA On Off On Off
+5V
0V
+5V
0V
HB On Off On Off
1 : 1
1/4 1/4 (phase difference)
Check the on/off ratio and the phase difference between HA and HB. 
3 Checking the parameters and input signals 
See Section “CNC STATE DISPLAY.” 
(1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the screen. 
When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the mode select signal using the PMC's 
signal status screen. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1 
 ↓ ↓ ↓
 Manual handle mode 1 0 0 
(2) Manual handle feed axis select signal is not input. 
Check the signals using the PMC's signal status screen. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A 
G0019 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A 
G0020 HS4D HS4C HS4B HS4A 
G0379 HS5D HS5C HS5B HS5A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 523 - 
When axis select switch for manual handle feed is selected on the machine operator's panel, if the signals 
are input as follows, it is normal. 
Selected axis HSnE HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA 
no selection 0 0 0 0 0 
1st axis 0 0 0 0 1 
2nd axis 0 0 0 1 0 
3rd axis 0 0 0 1 1 
4th axis 0 0 1 0 0 
5th axis 0 0 1 0 1 
6th axis 0 0 1 1 0 
7th axis 0 0 1 1 1 
8th axis 0 1 0 0 0 
9th axis 0 1 0 0 1 
10th axis 0 1 0 1 0 
11th axis 0 1 0 1 1 
12th axis 0 1 1 0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12th axis 0 1 1 0 0 
13th axis 0 1 1 0 1 
14th axis 0 1 1 1 0 
15th axis 0 1 1 1 1 
16th axis 1 0 0 0 0 
17th axis 1 0 0 0 1 
18th axis 1 0 0 1 0 
19th axis 1 0 0 1 1 
20th axis 1 0 1 0 0 
21st axis 1 0 1 0 1 
22nd axis 1 0 1 1 0 
23rd axis 1 0 1 1 1 
24th axis 1 1 0 0 0 
NOTE 
 In the above table, n is the number of the manual pulse generator (MPG) and up 
to 5 MPGs can be used. A feed axis is selected by 4-bit code of A to E. 
(3) Manual handle feed multiplication is not correct


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Check the following signals using the PMC's signal status screen. Also confirm the following parameters 
based on the parameter list. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0019 MP2 MP1 
In handle mode, the travel distance per step can be changed. 
MP2 MP1 Step feed Handle feed 
0 0 × 1 × 1 
0 1 × 10 × 10 
1 0 × 100 × Mn 
1 1 × 1000 × Nn 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
7100 MPX


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 524 - 
 #5 MPX In Manual handle feed mode, manual handle feed amount selection signal is 
0 : same for all manual pulse generator, and it is set by signals MP1 and 
MP2<Gn019.4,.5>. 
1 : differ to each other manual pulse generator, and it’s setting signal as follow: 
1st Manual Pulse Generator : MP1,MP2<Gn019.4,.5> 
2nd Manual Pulse Generator : MP21,MP22<Gn087.0,.1> 
3rd Manual Pulse Generator : MP31,MP32<Gn087.3,.4>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4th Manual Pulse Generator : MP41,MP42<Gn087.6,.7> 
5th Manual Pulse Generator : MP51,MP52<Gn380.0,.1> 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
7102 HNGx 
 #0 HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator 
0: Same in direction 
1: Reverse in direction 
7113 Manual handle feed magnification m 
7114 Manual handle feed magnification n 
7131 Manual handle feed magnification m2 / 2nd. manual pulse generator 
7132 Manual handle feed magnification n2 / 2nd. manual pulse generator


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7133 Manual handle feed magnification m3 / 3rd. manual pulse generator 
7134 Manual handle feed magnification n3 / 3rd. manual pulse generator 
7135 Manual handle feed magnification m4 / 4th. manual pulse generator 
7136 Manual handle feed magnification n4 / 4th. manual pulse generator 
7137 Manual handle feed magnification m5 / 5th. manual pulse generator 
7138 Manual handle feed magnification n5 / 5th. manual pulse generator


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(4) The specified axis is the index table indexing axis. <machining center system 
only> 
For the index table indexing axis (B-axis), jog feed, incremental feed, and manual handle feed cannot be 
performed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 525 - 
4 Checking the CNC diagnosis functions 
(1) Check CNC diagnosis data No. 0000, 1010. Check the items for which 1 is displayed at right side. 
* Items with (a) to (c) relate with manual and automatic operation and its detail is shown below. 
(a) In-position check is being done 
 It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the following diagnosis data. (It is 1 in 
the following condition)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the following condition) 
 DGN0300 Position Error>Parameter No.1826 In-position width 
(i) Check the parameters according to the parameter list. 
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000) 
(b) Interlock or start lock signal is input 
 There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal is used by the machine 
tool builder at the parameters shown below. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
3003 ITX ITL 
 #0 (ITL) ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#2 (ITX) ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2) 
 Check state of effective interlock signals using the PMC's signal status screen. 
(i) Interlock signal (*IT) is input. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0008 *IT 
 *IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input. 
(ii) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 
 *ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input. 
(c) NC is in a reset state


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(c) NC is in a reset state 
 In this state, not only manual operation but also automatic operation is disabled. Make an 
investigation according to the Section, "Manual Operation and Automatic Operation are 
Disabled."


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 526 - 
10.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE 
Points 
(1) Check manual operation is possible. 
(2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operator's manual. 
(3) Check status of CNC. 
Causes and Countermeasures 
When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasure, based on the Section, "Jog 
Operation cannot be done". 
Confirm that a correct mode is selected according to the mode select status of CNC status display. Also,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
by confirming the automatic operation status it is possible to identify cycle operation, feed hold and cycle 
stop state. 
1 When cycle operation is not started (Cycle start LED does not light) 
"****" is displayed at status display on screen. 
(1) Mode select signal is not correct. 
 When the mode select signal is input correctly, following status display is done. 
MDI : Manual data input mode (MDI) 
MEM : Memory operation mode 
RMT : Remote operation mode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
RMT : Remote operation mode 
 If status display does not show a correct status, check the mode signal with following PMC's signal 
status screen. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0043 DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1 
DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1 Mode select 
- 0 0 0 Manual data input (MDI) mode 
0 0 0 1 Automatic operation (MEM) mode 
1 0 0 1 Remote operation mode 
(2) Cycle start signal is not input 
 This signal turns 1 when cycle start button is pressed and turns 0 when it is released. The cycle start


key: chroma:document
string_value:
actuates when it changes from 1 to 0. Check the state of the signal using PMC's diagnosis 
function(PMCDGN). 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0007 ST 
 ST : Cycle start signal 
(3) Feed hold signal is input 
 Under normal state, the feed hold signal is 1 when the feed hold button is not pressed. 
 Check the state of this signal using the PMC's diagnosis function (PMCDGN). 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0008 *SP 
 *SP : Feed hold signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 527 - 
2 When an automatic operation is in progress (Cycle start LED is lit) 
CNC's status display shows "STRT" on the screen. 
(1) Check information displayed at CNC diagnosis data No. 0. Check the items for which 1 is displayed 
at the right side. 
Diagnosis 0 CNC internal state 1 
 [Data type] Bit 
 NAME Internal state when "1" is displayed 
a INPOSITION CHECK In-position check is being done. 
b FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Feedrate override is 0%.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
c JOG FEED OVERRIDE 0% Jog feedrate override is 0%. 
d INTER/START LOCK ON Interlock/start lock is on. 
e SPEED ARRIVAL ON The system is waiting for the speed arrival signal to 
turn on. 
 WAIT REVOLUTION The system is waiting for the spindle one-rotation 
signal in threading. 
 STOP POSITION OCDER The system is waiting for the rotation of the position 
coder in spindle feed per revolution. 
* Items with a to e relate with an automatic operation and their details are as follows :


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(a) In-position check (confirming positioning) is being done 
 Positioning (G00) to a specified position of a specified axis is not completed. 
 Whether positioning is completed or not is checked as the servo position error 
amount. Check it diagnosis data as follows: 
 Diagnosis 300 Position error > Parameter No. 1826 In-position width 
 Position error amount almost becomes 0, when positioning of an axis 
completes and when the amount becomes within the in-position width, it is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
assumed that positioning completes and the next block is executed. 
(b) Feedrate override is at 0% 
 Actual feedrate is overridden by the override signals to a programmed feedrate. 
Check the override signals using the PMC's signal status screen. 
• Normal override signal 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0 
 *FVn : Feedrate override 
<2nd override signal (option)> 
Feed rate is overridden more finely using the signals below:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
See MTB's manual whether this feature is equipped. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0 
 *AFVn : 2nd feed rate override 
• State of override signal 
*FV7 . . . . . *FV0 *AFV7 . . . *AFV0 
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0% 
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1% 
: : : : 
1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100% 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100% 
: : : : 
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 254% 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 254% 
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0%


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 528 - 
(c) Manual feedrate override is 0% (dry run) 
 Normally manual feedrate override function is used for jog feed. 
 But when DRN(dry run) signal turns on during an automatic operation, override values set with 
these signals become valid to the following speed set by a parameter. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0046 DRN 
 Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1. 
1410 Dry run rate 
 The rate when the following override value is 100%.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0 
G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8 
 When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is 
 [1111 . . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . . 0000]. 
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override 
1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00% 
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01% 
: : 
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00% 
: : 
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34% 
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00% 
(d) Interlock signal is input


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(d) Interlock signal is input 
 There are a plural number of interlock functions. Parameters are set by machine tool builders 
for which interlock function is used. 
 Therefore, confirm the following parameters at first: 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
3003 ITX ITL 
 ITL 0: Interlock signal(*IT) is valid. 
 ITX 0: Interlock signal (*ITn) is valid. 
 Confirm which interlock signal is activated by the PMC's signal status screen. 
(i) Interlock signals (*IT, *CSL, and *BSL) are input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0008 *BSL *CSL *IT 
 *IT=0, *CSL=0, and *BSL=0 show that interlock signal is input. 
(ii) Interlock signal per each axis (*ITn) is input 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 
 *ITn When the bit is 0, the corresponding axis's interlock signal is input. 
(iii) Controlled axis detach function is running. A detached axis is specified for travelling. 
* This function is valid when bit 7 (RMBx) of CNC parameter No. 1005=1. For whether


key: chroma:document
string_value:
this function is running or not, confirm the following signal using the PMC's signal status 
screen. Check the axis concerned.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 529 - 
1) The control axis detach signal (DTCHn) is input. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1 
 DTCHn If it is 1, the corresponding axis is detached. 
2) The following parameter enables the control axis detach function to the corresponding 
axis. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
0012 RMVx 
 RMVx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis 
 0: Not released 
 1: Released


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1: Released 
(Equivalent to the control axis detachment signals DTCH1, DTCH2, and so forth) 
(e) CNC is waiting for spindle speed arrival signal to be input 
 Actual spindle speed does not arrive at a speed specified in a program. 
 Confirm the signal state using the PMC's signal status screen. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0029 SAR 
 When this signal is 0, spindle speed does not arrive at the specified speed. 
 * This function is valid when the bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708=1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(2) Only rapid traverse in positioning (G00) does not function Confirm the following parameter and 
signals from the PMC. 
(a) Setting value of rapid traverse rate 
1420 Rapid traverse rate per axis 
(b) Rapid traverse override signals 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0014 ROV2 ROV1 
G0096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0 
 (HROV-0) (HROV=1) 
ROV1 ROV2 Override *HROV6 . . . *HROV0 Override 
0 0 100% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0% 
1 1 50% 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1% 
0 1 25% : :


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0 1 25% : : 
1 1 F0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100% 
1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate 
(3) Only feed (other than G00) does not function 
(a) Maximum feedrate set by parameter is incorrect. 
 Feedrate (other than G00) is clamped at this upper feedrate. 
1430 Maximum feedrate in each axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 530 - 
(b) Feedrate is specified by feed per revolution (mm/rev) 
(i) Position coder does not rotate 
 Check the connection between spindle and position coder 
 The following failure is considered: 
 - Timing belt is broken 
 - Key is removed 
 - Coupling is loose 
 - Connector of signal cable is loosened 
(ii) Position coder is faulty 
(c) Thread cutting does not operate 
(i) Position coder does not rotate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Check the connection between spindle and position coder 
 The following failure is considered: 
 - Timing belt is broken 
 - Key is removed 
 - Coupling is loose 
 - Connector of signal cable is loosened 
(ii) Position coder is faulty 
 Position coder is connected to the spindle amplifier when serial interface spindle is used or 
connected to the CNC when analog interface spindle is used. 
 For details of connection, refer to the following.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Whether A/B phase signals from the position coder are read correctly, can be judged also by 
the spindle speed display on the screen (position screen). 
 (However, it is not displayed when bit 2 (DPS) of parameter No. 3105 is set to 0). 
• αi series spindle amplifier 
CNC 
COP10A COP10B 
COP10A 
JYA3 
SPM 
JA7B 
JA7A 
JYA3
SPM 
Position coder 
Spindle motor 
Spindle motor 
Position coder 
Optical cable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Position coder 
Optical cable
(d) A cutting feed block containing a feedrate command (F command) with a feedrate of 0 is 
specified. 
 If the bit 7 (FCO) of parameter No. 1404 is set to 1, alarm PS0011, “FEED ZERO 
(COMMAND)” is not issued even if a feedrate command (F command) with a feedrate of 0 is 
issued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 531 - 
10.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF 
Points 
(1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows: 
(2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operator's panel. 
(3) Confirm CNC's diagnosis function. 
Causes and Countermeasures 
Check the states of the related signals on the signal status screen of PMC. 
a. Emergency stop is input 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
X0008 *ESP 
G0008 *ESP 
 *ESP=0 Emergency stop signal is input :


key: chroma:document
string_value:
b. External reset signal is input 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0008 ERS 
 #7(ERS) When the bit is 1, external reset signal is input. 
* This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M02 when an M02 is specified in a program 
as the end of a program. 
 Therefore, when M02 is executed, this signal is input. 
c. Reset button on the MDI is pressed 
An automatic operation is put into a reset status when key on the MDI panel is pressed. 
d. Reset & rewind signal is input


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0008 RRW 
 #6(RRW) When this signal is 1, the reset & rewind signal is input. 
* This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M30 when an M30 is specified in a program 
as the end of a program. 
 Therefore, when M30 is executed, this signal is input. 
e. Servo alarm has generated 
When any servo alarm has generated, cycle operation is put into the reset state and operation stop. 
f. Cycle operation is in a feed hold state


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The cycle operation becomes feed hold state in the following cases: 
(1) Modes are switched from an automatic operation mode to a manual operation mode. 
(2) Feed hold signal is input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 532 - 
• Mode select signal 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1 
 ↓ ↓ ↓
Automatic 
operation 
Memory edit (EDIT) 0 1 1 
Automatic operation (AUTO) 0 0 1 
Manual data input (MDI) 0 0 0 
Manual operation 
Jog feed (JOG) 1 0 1 
Handle/step 1 0 0 
TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1 
TEACH IN JOG 1 1 0 
• Feed hold signal 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0008 *SP 
 #5(*SP) When this signal is 0, the feed hold signal is input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
g. It become single block stop during automatic operation 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
G0046 SBK 
 #1(SBK) When this signal is 1, the single block signal is input. 
10.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE 
POWER IS TURNED ON 
Causes and Countermeasures 
If nothing is displayed on the LCD at power-up or if the LCD is locked with "LOADING GRAPHIC 
SYSTEM", the probable causes include the following: 
 - For the LCD-mounted type 
• The LCD cable or backlight cable is not connected.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• The necessary software is not installed. 
• The main board, GUI card, CPU card, or fan adapter board is defective. 
 Note) GUI card is mounted on Type 0 only. CPU card and servo card are mounted on the 
stand-alone type only. 
- For the stand-alone type 
• The display unit is not connected to the power supply. 
• The display unit is not connected to the CNC with the optical cable or the cable is broken. 
• The necessary software is not installed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• The main board, CPU card, or display unit is defective. 
 - LED display 
Check which LED lights on the main board while referencing the item “LED display” of the main board. 
If the main board has started up normally and the LED display indicates normal operation, a probable 
cause is a fault of the display system, such as a cable not connected or a defective fan adapter board. 
If the LED display is locked in the middle of the startup process, the probable causes include defective


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 533 - 
 - Connection of the LCD and backlight cables 
Check that the LCD and backlight cables are connected firmly to the corresponding connectors. 
These cables are connected before shipment from FANUC. This check is, however, required because the 
cables may be disconnected during maintenance. 
 - The necessary software is not installed 
If necessary software is not stored in the FROM module, the CNC may not start up. 
 - Defective printed circuit board


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the main board, GUI card, or CPU card is defective or is not correctly installed, the CNC may not start 
up. 
Check that the card PCBs are engaged firmly with the connectors on the main board. 
If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the main board, GUI card, and CPU card. 
Refer to Section “REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD” about the main board replacement. 
Refer to Section “HARDWARE OF LCD-MOUNTED TYPE CONTROL UNIT” or “HARDWARE OF


key: chroma:document
string_value:
STAND-ALONE TYPE CONTROL UNIT” about locations of the GUI card and CPU card, and refer to 
Section “MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS” about their replacement. 
10.8 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES CANNOT BE 
PERFORMED, INPUT/OUTPUT CANNOT BE PERFORMED 
PROPERLY 
Causes and Countermeasures 
If the I/O Link i is not established, if the signals from an I/O device cannot be input normally to the CNC,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
or if the signals from the CNC cannot be output to an I/O device, the probable causes include the 
following: 
• The I/O device is not turned on, or the power supply is not at the appropriate voltage. 
• The I/O Link i cable is not connected correctly or appropriately. 
• The grounding is not correct. 
• The input/output signals are not connected correctly. 
• I/O Link i allocation is not performed, or is not performed properly. 
 - PMC alarm 
 ER97 IO LINK FAILURE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ER97 IO LINK FAILURE 
If "ER97 I/O Link FAILURE(CHx Gyy)" is displayed on the alarm screen of the PMC, the number of I/O 
devices connected to channel xx of the I/O Link i is not the same as the number of devices allocated to the 
I/O Link i. 
 - I/O Link screen of the PMC 
From the function key menu, select [PMC MAINTE] and [I/O DEVICE] in that order. The I/O 
devices recognized by the CNC are displayed. From this screen, the devices that are connected normally 
can be determined.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 534 - 
Screen display example 
This example indicates that the I/O Link is as shown in the figure below. 
Control unit 
I/O module for 
connector panel 
Operator's panel I/O 
module 
Group 0 
Group 1 
JD51A
 - Checking the power supplies of the I/O devices 
Check that the connected I/O devices are connected properly to the power supplies and that the voltages 
are as prescribed. 
Check that the power-on sequence is correct.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Time at which an I/O device is to be turned on 
 Before the CNC is turned on or within 500 ms after the CNC is turned on 
When the CNC is turned off, the I/O devices must also be turned off. (Refer to Section “TURNING ON 
AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT” in the FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus 
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B-64693EN) for details.) 
 - Connection of cables 
As in the example shown on the previous page, I/O Link i cables are used to connect JD1A (JD51A) and 
JD1B.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
JD1B. 
JD1A (JD51A) represents an upper unit while JD1B represents a lower unit. 
Check that the cables are connected correctly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 535 - 
 - Connection of ground wires 
Check that the ground wires are connected and are not loose. 
 - Connection of I/O signals 
Check that the input/output signals to be connected to each I/O device are connected correctly. 
For operator's panel I/O modules and for connector panel I/O modules, also check that the 0 V or +24 V 
input signal is connected to the common pin and that the +24 V output signal is connected to the DO 
common pin.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
common pin. 
 - I/O Link i allocation 
Check that I/O Link i allocation has been performed correctly. 
From the function key menu, select [PMC CONF], [MODULE], and [EDIT] in that order. The 
allocation edit screen appears. 
After editing allocation, be sure to write the sequence program onto the flash ROM using the PMC data 
I/O screen. Otherwise, the changes will be lost when the power is turned off. 
10.9 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT TO 
AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS


key: chroma:document
string_value:
AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS 
If data is input to an invalid address in a connector panel I/O unit (for example, data that should be input 
to X004 is actually input to X010 in a connector panel I/O unit), the most likely causes are as follows: 
(1) The I/O Link i allocation is wrong. 
→ Perform the check described in Section 10.8. 
(2) The unit-to-unit cables (CA52-to-CA53) are not connected correctly. 
 If the connection is wrong, expansion unit 1 is allocated the address of expansion unit 3, as shown


key: chroma:document
string_value:
below. 
→ Connect the unit-to-unit cables as shown below: 
Correct connection (the allocation starts with X0)
Incorrect connection (the allocation starts with X0)
CA52 CA53 CA52 CA53 CA53 CA52
CA52 CA52 CA53 CA53 CA52 CA53
Basic Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Expansion 3
Basic Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Expansion 3
X0-2 X3-5 X6-8 X9-11
X0-2 X9-11 X6-8 X3-5
(3) The setting of the rotary switch on an expansion unit is wrong


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the rotary switch is set to 1, one unit number is skipped. If set to 2, two unit numbers are skipped. 
Usually, the setting must be 0. (For those units without a rotary switch, unit numbers cannot be 
skipped.) 
→ See the following example and refer to the FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus CONNECTION 
MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B-64693EN).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 536 - 
CA52 CA53
Basic Expansion 1
Example) Rotary switch setting on expansion unit 1=1
X0-2 X6-8 ⇐ X3 to X5 are skipped.
10.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS OUTPUT 
TO AN EXPANSION UNIT 
The most likely cause is that power is not being supplied to the expansion unit. 
→ Check whether +24-V power is supplied to No. 18 pin and No. 50 pin of the expansion unit, DI and 
DO signals are not input and output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
→ Check whether +24-V power is supplied to No. 1 pin and No. 3 pin of the expansion unit, when DI 
signals are input and DO signals are not output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 537 - 
10.11 ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087 
(RS-232C INTERFACE ALARM) 
START 
Alarm SR0087? 
YES 
YES 
NO 
Alarm SR0085? 
- Check baud rate and 
other I/O parameters 
- I/O device is faulty 
NO NO 
OFF 
YES 
ON 
NO 
YES 
Alarm SR0086? 
Is I/O parameter 
correct? 
- Reset the parameter 
according to the item 
of data I/O. 
- Turn on I/O device 
- Connect the cable 
- I/O device is faulty 
- Main board or serial 
communication board 
is faulty


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is faulty 
- I/O device is faulty 
- Main board or serial 
communication board 
is faulty 
Is power of I/O ? 
Is cable connection 
right? 
Causes 
(a) Parameters on RS-232C interface are not correct. 
 Check the following setting data and parameters. 
(b) External I/O device or host computer is faulty. 
(c) Main board or serial communication board is faulty. 
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty. 
Countermeasures 
(a) Parameters on RS-232C interface are not correct.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 538 - 
 - Setting 
PUNCH CODE=0 OR 1 (0: EIA,1:ISO) 
Select ISO or EIA according to the type of I/O device. 
If punch code does not match, alarm SR0086, “DR OFF” will generate. 
 - Parameter 
Value of parameter 0020 
Function 0 1 2 
Feed 0101#7 0111#7 0121#7 
Data input code 0101#3 0111#3 0121#3 
Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0 0121#0 
Type of I/O device 102 112 122 
Baud rate 103 113 123 
Communication method 0135#3 - - - 
 RS-232C 
Connector Main board


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Connector Main board 
JD56A JD36A 
NOTE 
 Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit numbers. 
 Example) 0101#7: Bit7 of parameter No. 0101. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
0101 NFD ASI SB2 
0111 
0121 
 NFD 0: Feed is output before and after data in data output 
 (FANUC PPR) 
 1: Feed is not output (standard). 
 ASI 0: Data input code is EIA or ISO (automatic recognition) 
 1: Data input code is ASCII. 
 SB2 0: No. of stop bits is 1. 
 1: No. of stop bits is 2. 
0102 Type of I/O device


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0102 Type of I/O device 
0112 
0122 Value TYPE OF I/O DEVICE 
 0 RS–232C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4) 
 1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/ B2) 
 2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1) 
 3 
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, 
FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR 
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, 
FANUC Handy File, 
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H 
 4 RS–232C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4) 
 5 Portable tape reader 
 6 FANUC PPR, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, 
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 539 - 
0103 Baud rate 
0113 
0123 Value Baud rate 11 9600 
 7 600 12 19200 
 8 1200 
 9 2400 
 10 4800 
(b) External I/O device or Host computer is in trouble 
(i) Check whether the setting on communication of external I/O device or host computer is the 
same as that of the CNC. (baud rate, stop bits, etc.) 
 If they are not the same, change the setting. 
(ii) When spare I/O device presents, check whether it is possible to realize communication using


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the spare I/O device. 
(c) Main board or serial communication control module is faulty 
(i) When parameter No.0020 is 0, 1, or 2 (JA36A or JD56A, JD36A or JD36B of Main board) 
 Replace the module since main board may be faulty. 
(d) Cable between CNC and I/O device is faulty. 
 Check the cable for disconnection or wrong connection. 
 - Connection 
Main board RS-232C(JD36A,JD56A) 
Punch panel 
Such as I/O device 
RS-232C(JD36A,JD36B)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 540 - 
 - Cable connection 
RS-232C (JD36A JD56A) 
 (JD36A JD36B) 
 
RD (01) 
0V (02) 
DR (03) 
0V (04) 
CS (05) 
0V (06) 
CD (07) 
0V (08) 
+24V (10) 
SD (11) 
0V (12) 
ER (13) 
0V (14) 
RS (15) 
0V (16) 
 (17) 
 (18) 
+24V (19) 
 (20) 
(03) RD 
(06) DR 
(05) CS 
(08) CD 
(02) SD 
(20) ER 
(04) RS 
(07) SG 
(25) +24V 
(01) FG 
Punch panel 
Connector : Half-pitch 
20-pins (PCR) 
Connector :DBM-25S 
Shield 
G G 
 (09)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 541 - 
10.12 ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS 
ABNORMAL) 
Contents 
Reference position return was executed when the following condition is not satisfied: 
The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis is moving to the reference position 
at a speed higher than a speed equivalent to 128 pulses of position error amount (DGN300). 
Countermeasures 
F×5000/3 
START 
Check whether position gain is greater than 128


key: chroma:document
string_value:
pulses (DGN 300) before or during reference position
return. 
Position error amount : 
DGN 300 
128 or more 
YES 
NO 
(1) Next page 
Raise the speed 
Check feed rate command: 
PRM 1420 F : Rapid traverse rate [mm/min] 
PRM 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate [mm/min] 
PRM 1825 G : Servo loop gain [0.01sec-1] 
Detection unit : Move amount to a command pulse (usually 1μm) 
In metric machine, if the no. of digits below decimal point is
4 on the position display screen, detection unit is 0.1 μm.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G × detection unit [μm/PULSE] 
Check reference position return deceleration signal 
*DEC1 to *DEC8 DGN 009.0 to 009.7 
 When reference position return is started from deceleration signal 0, feed
rate becomes FL rate. 
 PRM 1425 FL rate 
Position error = 
Check rapid traverse override signals : 
ROV1 DGN 014.0 
 
ROV2 DGN 014.1 
 
PRM 1421 F0 rate 
ROV1 ROV2 Override 
 0 0 100% 
 0 1 50% 
 1 0 25% 
 1 1 F0 rate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 542 - 
Pulse coder power voltage is low
(1)
Check whether the motor rotated more than one
rotation (one rotation signal is issued ) at faster than
128 pulses of position error amount.
Return start position is too close
- Change the return start position.
- Move the machine at faster that 128
pulses for more than one rotation to
wards RP.
NO
YES
NO
YES
Rotated ?
Check that voltage of Pulsecoder is higher than 4.75 V.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To measure Pulsecoder voltage, remove the motor cover and measure on
pulse coder PCB at across + and - or +5V and 0V terminals.
More than 4.75V
Hardware failure
- Pulse coder is faulty
Change Pulsecoder or motor
 CAUTION 
(1) After the Pulsecoder or motor is exchanged, reference position or machine's 
standard point may be different from former one. Please set it correctly. 
Reference 
 A speed more than 128 pulses is required because if speed is lower that this,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
one-rotation signal does not function stably, causing improper position detection. 
 If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a speed corresponding to a positional 
deviation of 1280 pulses or more is required. 
 Parameter No. 1836 can be set to 128 or less, as the minimum positional 
deviation with which reference position return is possible. (If the parameter is set 
to 0, 128 is assumed as the minimum positional deviation. If bit 0 of parameter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 543 - 
10.13 ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION 
RETURN) 
Absolute position data in the serial Pulsecoder was lost. 
(This alarm will be generated when serial Pulsecoder is exchanged or position feedback signal cable of 
the serial Pulsecoder is disconnected). 
Countermeasures 
Machine position must be memorized using the following method: 
 - When reference position return function is present


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Execute manual reference position return only for an axis for which this alarm was generated. When 
manual reference position return cannot be executed because of an another alarm, set bit 5 (APCx) 
of parameter No. 1815 to 0 and release the alarm and perform manual operation. 
2 Press key at the end of reference position return to release the alarm. 
 - When reference position return function is not present 
Execute dogless reference position setting to memorize the reference position.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- When serial Pulsecoder is changed 
Since the reference position is different from the former one, change the grid shift value (parameter No. 
1850) to correct the position. 
Related parameters 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
1815 APCx APZx 
 #4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position 
detector is used 
0: Not corresponding 
1: Corresponding 
 When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment is performed or after


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the absolute position detector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, power must be 
turned off and on, then manual reference position return must be performed. This 
completes the positional correspondence between the machine position and the position 
on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1 automatically. 
 #5 APCx Position detector 
0: Other than absolute position detector 
1: Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 544 - 
10.14 ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF) 
Causes and Countermeasures 
This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal VRDY of a servo amplifier does not turn on or if the signal 
turns off during operation. 
There are cases in which this alarm is issued because another servo alarm is issued. If this occurs, first 
take the action for the first alarm. 
Check the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier. The servo amplifier, the main board (Basic unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A) or the servo cards (Basic unit B) on the CNC may be defective. 
 - VRDY 
CNC Servo amplifier
MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier
(Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)
VRDY: From the servo amplifier to the CNC
(Notifies that the servo is ready)
The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical cable). 
 - Example of connection around the amplifier (Typical example) 
Emergency stop 
circuit 
Servo 
motor 
Servo 
motor 
Spindle 
motor


key: chroma:document
string_value:
motor 
Spindle 
motor 
Circuit 
breaker 
Circuit 
breaker 
AC 
reactor 
Single-p
hase 
3-phase 
Servo 
amplifier 
Servo 
amplifier 
Common 
power 
supply 
Spindle 
amplifier 
Control 
power 
supply


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 545 - 
Check items 
• Is the Common Power Supply on? 
• Has an emergency stop been canceled? 
• Is MCC on? If there is an external MCC sequence in addition to the MCC contact of the Common 
Power Supply, check that sequence also. 
• Is the power for driving MCC supplied? 
• Is the breaker on? 
• Has some alarm been issued in the Common Power Supply or spindle amplifier? 
 Diagnosis data No. 358, V ready-off information. (See Section, “DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for


key: chroma:document
string_value:
details.) 
 - Replacing the servo amplifier 
If no problem is found in the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier, replace the servo amplifier. 
 - Replacing the main board or the servo cards 
If the above action does not solve the problem, replace the main board (Basic unit A) or the servo cards 
(Basic unit B). 
10.15 ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON) 
Causes and Countermeasures 
This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo amplifier remains on.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The servo amplifier, the main board (Basic unit A) or the servo cards (Basic unit B) on the CNC may be 
defective. 
 - VRDY 
CNC Servo amplifier
MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier
(Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)
VRDY: From the servo amplifier to the CNC
(Notifies that the servo is ready)
The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical cable). 
This alarm is issued if VRDY remains on when the CNC turns MCON off or if VRDY turns on before the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC turns MCON on. 
 - Replacing the servo amplifier 
The servo amplifier may be defective. Replace the servo amplifier. 
 - Replacing the main board or the servo cards 
If replacing the servo amplifier does not solve the problem, replace the main board (Basic unit A) or the 
servo cards (Basic unit B).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 546 - 
10.16 ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED) 
ALARM SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED) 
Causes and Countermeasures 
Alarm SV0462 is issued if a slave (servo amplifier) cannot receive correct data due to an FSSB 
communication error. 
Alarm SV0463 is issued if the CNC cannot receive correct data due to an FSSB communication error. 
If these alarms are issued, the alarm message indicates the number of the defective axis (axis name).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Servo amplifier or optical cable 
Any of the optical cables between the CNC control unit and the amplifier corresponding to the axis 
number indicated in the alarm message may be defective. 
Or, any of the first amplifier to the amplifier corresponding to that axis number may be defective. 
 - The main board or the axis control cards 
The main board or the servo cards installed on the CNC may be defective. 
10.17 ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS 
ABNORMAL)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ABNORMAL) 
Digital servo parameters are abnormal. 
(Digital servo parameters are set incorrectly.) 
Check diagnosis data Nos.203#4, 280, and 352, detail number for invalid servo parameter setting alarm. 
(See Section, “DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for details.) 
Causes 
(1) Check bit 4 of diagnosis data No. 203 to see where the alarm was detected. 
If bit 4 of diagnosis data No. 203 = 0: 
 A CNC detection parameter is invalid. For details, check diagnosis data No. 280.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If bit 4 of diagnosis data No. 203 = 1: 
 A servo detection parameter is invalid. For details, check diagnosis data No. 352. 
(2) If a CNC detection parameter is invalid, check diagnosis data No. 280 and the settings of the 
following parameters. 
Parameter No. 2020 : Motor format number 
Parameter No. 2022 : Motor rotation direction 
Parameter No. 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks 
Parameter No. 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback 
Parameter No. 1023 : Servo axis number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio 
Parameter No. 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio 
Parameter No. 2211#6 : 2-winding motor is used. 
Parameter No. 2211#7 : 4-winding motor is used. 
(3) If a servo detection parameter is invalid, check diagnosis data No. 352 to find the cause, and correct 
the corresponding servo parameter. Refer to the servo parameter manual for explanations about the 
value of diagnosis data No. 352 and how to correct the invalid parameter setting.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 547 - 
10.18 ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) 
Causes and Countermeasures 
This alarm is issued if the ambient temperature of the CNC control unit is abnormally high. As an 
installation condition, the ambient temperature of the CNC must not exceed 58°C (for LCD-mounted 
type) or 55°C (for stand-alone type). 
 - Ambient temperature 
A temperature monitoring circuit is installed on the main board, and causes this alarm to be issued if the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ambient temperature is abnormally high. 
Take appropriate action to the cabinet that houses the CNC control unit so that the temperature falls 
within the proper temperature range (0 to 58°C (for LCD-mounted type) or 0 to 55°C (for stand-alone 
type)). 
If it is obvious that the ambient temperature is not abnormal, the main board may be defective. 
10.19 ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) 
Causes and Countermeasures


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Causes and Countermeasures 
This alarm is issued if a fault occurs in any of the fan motors, such as the stoppage of a fan motor during 
the operation of the CNC. 
 - Fan motors 
Fan motors are installed in the uppermost portion of the CNC control unit. Each fan motor is attached 
with an alarm detector circuit, which notifies the CNC of a fault such as the stoppage of the fan motor, 
thereby issuing this alarm.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
thereby issuing this alarm. 
If this alarm is issued, replace the fan motor according to Subsection “LCD-mounted Type Control Unit” 
or “Stand-alone Type Control Unit” in Section “REPLACING A FAN”. 
10.20 ALARM SV5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT) 
ALARM SV5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR) 
ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT) 
Causes and Countermeasures 
These alarms are issued due to a failure in the optical cable, servo card, or a slave such as a servo


key: chroma:document
string_value:
amplifier connected to the FSSB. They are issued also if the setting of a parameter related to the FSSB is 
incorrect. Check diagnosis data Nos. 3510, 3511, and 3513 and change the corresponding parameter 
accordingly. (See Section, “DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for details.) 
No. Message Description 
SV5134 FSSB:OPEN READY 
TIME OUT 
In the initialization, the FSSB could not be in an open ready sate. The 
servo card is thought to be defective. 
SV5137 FSSB:CONFIGURATION 
ERROR


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ERROR 
An FSSB configuration error occurred. 
The connecting amplifier type is incompatible with the FSSB setting value. 
SV5197 FSSB:OPEN TIME OUT The initialization of the FSSB was completed, but it could not be opened. 
Or, the connection between the CNC and the amplifier in is incorrect. 
 - Checking the parameter settings 
Check that the FSSB-related parameters are set correctly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 548 - 
 - Power supplies of the servo amplifiers 
Check the power supplies of the servo amplifiers connected to the FSSB. 
 - Replacing the main board, the servo cards, optical cables, and servo 
amplifiers 
Replace the main board (Basic unit A) or the servo cards (Basic unit B) on the CNC. 
Replace the optical cables and servo amplifiers connected to the FSSB, one at a time, to identify the 
defective item. 
10.21 ALARM SV5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Causes and Countermeasures 
The number of servo amplifiers recognized by the FSSB is insufficient, compared with the number of 
controlled axes. 
 - FSSB setting screen 
If this alarm is issued, display the amplifier setting screen from the FSSB setting screen. Only the servo 
amplifiers recognized on the FSSB are displayed. 
 - Optical cable or servo amplifier 
The optical cable that connects together the last recognized amplifier and the next one may be defective.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Or, either of the amplifiers connected together with that optical cable may be defective. Check the power 
supplies of the amplifiers. 
 - Power fault of a servo amplifier 
This alarm may be issued if a power fault occurs in a servo amplifier. A power fault occurs if the 
amplifier control power supply voltage drops, if the +5 V conductor of the Pulsecoder cable is ground, or 
for other reasons. 
 - The main board or servo cards


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The main board (Basic unit A) or the servo cards (Basic unit B) installed on the CNC may be defective. 
10.22 SERVO ALARMS 
The servo alarms are listed in Appendix, “ALARM LIST”. For explanations about the alarms related to 
servo amps and servo motors, refer to the FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi-B/αi series, AC SPINDLE 
MOTOR αi-B series, SERVO AMPLIFIER αi-B series, AC SERVO MOTOR βi-B/βi series, AC 
SPINDLE MOTOR βi-B series, SERVO AMPLIFIER βi-B series MAINTENANCE MANUAL" 
(B-65515EN).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(B-65515EN). 
If the hardware on the CNC is suspected to be defective as a result of examination, replace the main board 
(Basic unit A) or the servo cards (Basic unit B). 
10.23 SPINDLE ALARMS 
For an explanation of the following spindle alarms, refer to the FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi-B/αi
series, AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi-B series, SERVO AMPLIFIER αi-B series, AC SERVO MOTOR 
βi-B/βi series, AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi-B series, SERVO AMPLIFIER βi-B series MAINTENANCE 
MANUAL" (B-65515EN).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 549 - 
Number Contents 
SP9001 to later: Spindle_n n-th spindle alarm (Spindle alarm display 01 or larger) 
10.24 SYSTEM ALARMS 
10.24.1 Overview 
The FANUC 0i–F series makes a transition to the special processing state called the system alarm state 
when a state that disables the continuation of normal system operation is detected. 
When the system alarm state is entered, the CNC screen display is switched and the following operations 
are performed:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
are performed: 
• Servo and spindle amplifier excitation is turned off. 
• Disconnection of I/O Link i communication 
Fig. 10.24.1 (a) Example of system alarm screen 
Types of System Alarms 
System alarms are classified into three types according to the following causes: 
• Software causes 
• Hardware causes 
• Others 
 - Software causes 
Mainly, the CNC system software detects software errors. 
Typical causes are as follows:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Conflict in processing/data detected by the internal state monitoring software 
• Access to outside of the valid data/instruction ranges 
• Division by zero 
• Stack overflow 
• Stack underflow 
• DRAM checksum error 
 - Hardware causes 
Mainly, hardware detects hardware errors.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 550 - 
Typical causes are as follows: 
• Parity error (DRAM, SRAM, cache) 
• Bus error 
• Power supply alarm 
• FSSB cable disconnection 
 - Others 
Moreover, system alarms are caused by the following: 
• Causes detected by peripheral software 
 Servo software (such as watchdog) 
 PMC software (such as an I/O link communication error) 
10.24.2 Operations on the System Alarm Screen 
Description of system alarm screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When a system alarm is issued, the screen display is switched to a screen as shown below (Fig. 10.24.2 
(a)). 
This screen is referred to as the system alarm screen. 
Fig. 10.24.2 (a) System alarm screen 
The system alarm screen consists of several pages of information. 
The following key operations are used: 
, Switches between pages. 
 Executes the IPL monitor. 
Saving of system alarm information 
Various information items related to a system alarm are saved in the SRAM.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The SRAM can store information about the latest two system alarms. 
If a third system alarm is issued when information about the latest two system alarms is stored, the 
information about the oldest system alarm is discarded, and information about the new system alarm is 
saved. 
Saved system alarm information can be output from the IPL screen to the memory card.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 551 - 
Output of system alarm information 
System alarm information can be output from the System Alarm History Screen or IPL screen to the 
memory card. For the output method from System Alarm History Screen, refer to the section “SYSTEM 
ALARM HISTORY SCREEN” in this manual. The output method from IPL screen is as follows. 
1. Start the IPL monitor. 
 If the system alarm screen is displayed when a system alarm is issued, press the key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the power is turned off, turn on the power while holding down "-" and ".". 
2. On the IPL monitor screen, enter 5 to select "5. SYSTEM ALARM UTILITY". 
3. Enter 2 to select "2. OUTPUT SYSTEM ALARM FILE".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 552 - 
4. If the IPL monitor is executed on the system alarm screen, enter 2 to select "2. OUTPUT SYSTEM 
ALARM FILE FROM DRAM". 
 If the power is turned off, enter 1 to select "1. OUTPUT SYSTEM ALARM FILE FROM 
FILE-RAM". 
5. If 1 is selected in step 4, a list of saved system alarms is displayed. Enter the number of a file to be 
output. 
6. Enter the file name to output the file.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 553 - 
NOTE 
1 Specify the name of a file to be output to a memory card in the format of a file 
name (8 characters) and file extension (3 characters). Begin the file name and 
file extension with an alphabetic letter or number. 
2 If the name of a file output to a memory card contains any of the characters 
listed below, a problem will arise when an attempt is made to read data from the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
file on a PC. So, do not use these characters. The period can be used only as a 
delimiter between the file name and file extension. 
 . " / ¥ [ ] : ; = , * ? < > + (space character) 
3 If the name of a file output to a memory card is any of the character strings listed 
below, a problem will arise when an attempt is made to read data from the file on 
a PC. So, do not use these character strings as a file name. 
 CON , AUX , COM1 , COM2 , COM3 , COM4 , LPT1 , LPT2 , LPT3 , PRN , NUL


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10.24.3 System Alarms Detected by Hardware 
System alarm 400 and subsequent system alarms indicate errors detected by hardware. 
The basic screen configuration is shown below: 
①
②
③
④
⑤
｜
｜
｜
↓
⑥
｜
｜
｜
｜
｜
｜
｜
｜
｜
｜
｜
｜
｜
↓
SERIES 0I DXXX 
SYS_ALM401 EXTERNAL BUS INVALID ADDRESS 
MAIN BOARD 
2010/04/14 17:09:53 
PROGRAM COUNTER : 1000B52CH 
ACT TASK : 01000010H 
ACCESS ADDRESS : - 
ACCESS DATA : - 
ACCESS OPERATION : - 
BUS MASTER PCB : MAIN BOARD


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BUS MASTER PCB : MAIN BOARD 
 +--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+ 
 02 MAIN BOARD03012003 22110000 80010000 00000000 00010000 00000000 
 FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 68C08216 70FE0000 00000000 00000000 
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 
BUS SLAVE PCB : CPU CARD 
 +--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+ 
 00 CPU CARD 02071004 20100000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 
 FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 10B0FC00 CFF90001 68C30061 82160010


key: chroma:document
string_value:
000000F0 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000 
INFORMATION REGISTER 
 +--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+ 
 02 MAIN BOARD00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 
 PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1/8) 
[Description of the message screen] 
(1): Device name, and series and edition of CNC system software 
(2): System alarm number and error message 
(3): Most possibly faulty component 
(4): Date and time when the error occurred


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(5): Software error and other information when the error occurred 
(6): Bus information when the error occurred


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 554 - 
NOTE 
 Item (3) indicates the most possibly faulty component. Mainly, check the 
component to see whether it is defective. See the Table 10.24.3 (a) for the alarm 
messages that may prompt you to take measures other than the replacement of 
a component indicated by Item (3). 
Information about system alarms displayed on the screen can be output as a text file via the PCMCIA port 
of the LCD.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of the LCD. 
For the method of outputting it, see Subsection, "Operations on the System Alarm Screen". 
Table 10.24.3 (a) 
Message Description Causes Countermeasures 
SYS_ALM401 
EXTERNAL BUS 
INVALID ADDRESS 
A problem 
occurred on a 
CNC bus. 
The printed circuit 
board may be 
defective or 
external noise 
may affect the 
bus. 
It is likely that, besides the most possibly faulty 
component displayed, the main board and “MASTER 
PCB” or “SLAVE PCB” displayed on the system alarm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen may be defective. This error may also be 
caused by external noise. Check whether there is a 
noise origin around the machine and whether the 
machine is grounded properly. 
SYS_ALM403 
S-BUS TIME OUT 
ERROR 
A problem 
occurred on a 
CNC bus. 
The printed circuit 
board may be 
defective. 
It is likely that, besides the most possibly faulty 
component displayed, the main board and “MASTER 
PCB” or “SLAVE PCB” displayed on the system alarm 
screen may be defective. 
SYS_ALM404


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SYS_ALM404 
ECC 
UNCORRECTABLE 
ERROR 
A problem 
occurred on a 
CNC bus. 
The printed circuit 
board may be 
defective or 
external noise 
may affect the 
bus. 
It is likely that, besides the most possibly faulty 
component displayed, the main board and “MASTER 
PCB” or “SLAVE PCB” displayed on the system alarm 
screen may be defective. 
This error may also be caused by external noise. 
Check whether there is a noise origin around the 
machine and whether the machine is grounded


key: chroma:document
string_value:
properly. 
SYS_ALM502 
NOISE ON POWER 
SUPPLY 
Noise or an 
instantaneous 
power failure 
occurred in 
the CNC 
power supply. 
A power fault 
occurs. 
Identify and remove the cause of an abnormal 
condition such as noise. This error may damage 
SRAM data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 555 - 
10.24.4 System Alarms 114 to 160 (Alarms on the FSSB) 
Causes 
An alarm was detected on the FSSB. 
NOTE 
 The alarm message states the location of a faulty component. The location is 
indicated using the following character strings. 
MAIN : Servo card in the CNC 
AMPx : The xth servo amplifier or spindle amplifier as counted from the CNC of 
each line. 
A 2-axis amplifier and 3-axis amplifier are each counted as one unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SDUx : The xth separate detector interface unit as counted from the CNC of 
each line 
LINEx : FSSB line where an alarm arose 
 ”/LINEx” following a message if displayed indicates the number of an optical 
connector on the main board (Basic unit A) or on the servo card (Basic unit B). 
LINE1 : COP10A on the main board or COP10A-1 on the servo card 
Message Description and countermeasures 
SYS_ALM114 FSSB DISCONNECTION (MAIN -> AMP1) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM115 FSSB DISCONNECTION (MAIN -> SDU1) /LINEx


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SYS_ALM116 FSSB DISCONNECTION (AMPn -> AMPm) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM117 FSSB DISCONNECTION (AMPn -> SDU m) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM118 FSSB DISCONNECTION (SDU n -> AMP m) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM119 FSSB DISCONNECTION (SDU n -> SDU m) /LINEx 
<Description> 
No FSSB communication can be 
performed between the units stated in the 
parentheses. 
<Countermeasures> 
Replace the main board, the servo card, 
amplifier, or separate detector interface 
unit of interest. 
It is also likely that there may be a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
problem on an optical fiber cable between 
the connections of interest. 
SYS_ALM120 FSSB DISCONNECTION (MAIN <- AMP1) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM121 FSSB DISCONNECTION (MAIN <- SDU 1) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM122 FSSB DISCONNECTION (AMPn <- AMPm) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM123 FSSB DISCONNECTION (AMPn <- SDU m) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM124 FSSB DISCONNECTION (SDU n <- AMP m) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM125 FSSB DISCONNECTION (SDU n <- SDU m) /LINEx 
<Description> 
No FSSB communication can be 
performed between the units stated in the 
parentheses.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parentheses. 
<Countermeasures> 
Replace the main board, the servo card, 
amplifier, or separate detector interface 
unit of interest. 
It is also likely that there may be a 
problem on an optical fiber cable between 
the connections of interest. 
It is likely that there may be an abnormal 
condition in the power supply for the 
right-side unit stated in the parentheses. 
Check to see if there is any abnormality in 
the power supplied to the unit and if there


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 556 - 
Message Description and countermeasures 
SYS_ALM126 SERVO AMP INTERNAL DISCONNECTION 
 (AMPn) -> /LINEx 
SYS_ALM127 SERVO AMP INTERNAL DISCONNECTION 
 (AMPn) <- /LINEx 
<Description> 
Abnormal communication data was 
detected in the amplifier stated in the 
parentheses. 
<Countermeasures> 
Replace the amplifier of interest. 
SYS_ALM129 ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY 
(SERVO:AMPn) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM130 ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY 
(SERVO:SDUn) /LINEx 
<Description>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<Description> 
An abnormal condition was detected in the 
power for the unit stated in the 
parentheses. 
<Countermeasures> 
A voltage drop was detected in the power 
supplied to the unit of interest. Check to 
see if there is any abnormality in the 
power supply or power supply cable and if 
there is a voltage drop in the input power 
due to surge current. 
SYS_ALM134 FSSB LINE DATA ERROR 
(AMPn) > .. > MAIN /LINEx 
SYS_ALM135 FSSB LINE DATA ERROR 
(SDUn) > .. > MAIN /LINEx 
<Description>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<Description> 
Abnormal data was detected in the unit 
stated in the parentheses. 
<Countermeasures> 
Replace the unit of interest. If an alarm is 
issued even after the replacement, 
replace the slaves previous to the unit of 
interest in succession. If the alarm lingers, 
replace the servo card (or additional axis 
board). It is also likely that there may be a 
problem on an optical fiber cable between 
the connections of interest. 
SYS_ALM138 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (MAIN <- AMPn) 
/LINEx


key: chroma:document
string_value:
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM139 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (MAIN <- SDUn) 
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM140 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (AMPn <- AMPm) 
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM141 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (AMPn <- SDUm) 
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM142 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (SDUn <- AMPm) 
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM143 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (SDUn <- SDUm) 
/LINEx 
<Description> 
A communication data error was detected 
between the units stated in the 
parentheses. 
<Countermeasures> 
Replace the right-side unit stated in the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parentheses. It is also likely that there 
may be a problem on other unit or an 
optical fiber cable between the 
connections of interest. 
SYS_ALM144 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (MAIN -> AMPn) 
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM145 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (MAIN -> SDUn) 
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM146 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (AMPn -> AMPm) 
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM147 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (AMPn -> SDUm) 
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM148 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (SDUn -> AMPm) 
/LINEx 
SYS_ALM149 FSSB OUT OF CORRECTION (SDUn -> SDUm) 
/LINEx


key: chroma:document
string_value:
/LINEx 
<Description> 
A communication data error was detected 
between the units stated in the 
parentheses. 
<Countermeasures> 
Replace the left-side unit stated in the 
parentheses. It is also likely that there 
may be a problem on other unit or an 
optical fiber cable between the 
connections of interest.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 557 - 
Message Description and countermeasures 
SYS_ALM150 SLAVE DMA BUS FAILURE (AMPn ) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM151 SLAVE DMA BUS FAILURE (SDUn ) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM152 SLAVE LSI DMA BUS FAILURE (AMPn ) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM153 SLAVE LSI DMA BUS FAILURE (SDUn ) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM154 SLAVE LOCAL ERROR NO.1 (AMPn ) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM155 SLAVE WATCH DOG ALARM (AMPn ) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM156 SLAVE LOCAL ERROR NO.2 (SDUn ) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM157 SLAVE LOCAL ERROR NO.3 (AMPn ) /LINEx


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SYS_ALM158 SLAVE LOCAL ERROR NO.3 (SDUn ) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM159 SPINDLE RAM FAILURE (AMPn) /LINEx 
SYS_ALM160 SPINDLE WATCH DOG ALARM (AMPn) /LINEx 
<Description> 
An error was detected in a circuit in the 
unit stated in the parentheses. 
<Countermeasures> 
Replace the unit of interest. 
10.25 SYSTEM ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND I/O Link 
If a system alarm (SYS_ALM194, 195, 196, 197) and alarm number (PCxxx) stated below are displayed,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the system alarm is related to PMC, I/O Link i, A probable cause is a faulty PMC control circuit, an 
abnormal condition in I/O Link communication, or the like. 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM197 EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR
PLEASE CHECK THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: 
2010/04/18 12:00:00
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR:(40xx-xxxx) 
 PC097 LADDER CRC ERROR (DCSPMC)
 
 -----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
CPU CARD 
------------------------------------------------------


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 558 - 
10.25.1.1 System alarms 197, 199 (PMC general) 
These alarms are PMC system alarms. See Appendix, “PMC System Alarm Messages” for alarm 
descriptions. 
Display examle 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM197 EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR
PLEASE CHECK THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: 
2010/04/18 12:00:00
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR:(40xx-xxxx) 
 PC097 LADDER CRC ERROR (DCSPMC)
 
 -----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
CPU CARD


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CPU CARD 
------------------------------------------------------ 
 
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5) 
System alarm 197 display 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM199 NON MASK INTERRUPT
OTHER-CPU 
2010/04/18 12:00:00
PROGRAM COUNTER : _________
ACT TASK : _________
ACCESS ADDRESS : ____-____
ACCESS DATA : ____-____
ACCESS OPERATION : ____-____
+----------------------------------------------------------+
+ THE SYSTEM ALARM HAS OCCURRED, THE SYSTEM HAS STOPPED. +


key: chroma:document
string_value:
+----------------------------------------------------------+ 
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5) 
System alarm 199 display (page 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 559 - 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM199 NON MASK INTERRUPT
OTHER-CPU 
2010/04/18 12:00:00
OPTION BOARD SYSTEM ERROR:(40xx-xxxx) 
 PC098 PMC SOFTWARE ECC ERROR (xxxxxxxx:xx)
 
 -----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
MAIN BOARD 
------------------------------------------------------ 
 
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000


key: chroma:document
string_value:
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000


key: chroma:document
string_value:
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 2 / 5) 
System alarm 199 display (page 2)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 560 - 
10.25.1.2 System alarm 196 (PMC watchdog) 
This alarm is a PMC watchdog system alarm. See Appendix, “PMC System Alarm Messages” for alarm 
descriptions. 
Display example 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM196 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM
MAIN BOARD 
2010/04/18 12:00:00
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR:(40xx-xxxx) 
 PC073 WATCH-DOG ALARM(CNC<->PMC)
 
 -----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
MAIN BOARD 
------------------------------------------------------


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 561 - 
10.25.1.3 System alarm 195 (related to the I/O Link) 
This alarm is an I/O Link system alarm. See Appendix, “PMC System Alarm Messages” for alarm 
descriptions. 
Display example 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM195 IO LINK ALARM
IO LINK
2008/11/18 12:00:00
 
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR(40XX-XXXX)
PC050 I/O LINK ER1 CH1:GR03:xx
COMMUNICATION ALARM AT CH1 : GROUP 03 
-----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
CH1 / GROUP03


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CH1 / GROUP03 
------------------------------------------------------ 
RT=0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
G00=00,00,00,00 G01=00,00,00,00
G02=00,00,00,00 G03=3C,3C,3C,00
G04=00,00,00,00 G05=00,00,00,00
G06=00,00,00,00 G07=00,00,00,00
G08=00,00,00,00 G09=00,00,00,00
G10=00,00,00,00 G11=00,00,00,00
G12=00,00,00,00 G13=00,00,00,00
G14=00,00,00,00 G15=00,00,00,00
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 562 - 
10.25.1.4 System alarm 194 (related to the I/O Link i) 
This alarm is an I/O Link i system alarm. See Appendix, “PMC System Alarm Messages” for alarm 
descriptions. 
Display example 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM194 IO LINK I ALARM
IO LINK I
2008/11/18 12:00:00
 
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR(40XX-XXXX)
PC052 I/O LINK I
PMC LSI RAM PARITY ERROR 
-----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
MAIN BORAD


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MAIN BORAD 
------------------------------------------------------ 
MA=03,FF,00,00,00,80 ME=00,00 GE=10,00 TOC=02 TTOC=05
RT=0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5) 
Master hardware failure display 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM194 IO LINK I ALARM
IO LINK I
2008/11/18 12:00:00
 
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR(40XX-XXXX)
PC053 I/O LINK I
SLAVE LSI RAM PARITY ERROR 
-----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
CH1 / UNIT3(GROUP2) : I/O UNIT-A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
------------------------------------------------------ 
MA=03,FF,00,00,00,80 ME=00,00 GE=10,00 TOC=02 TTOC=05
RT=0,0,3,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0 
G02 RC=03 RT=05 H=00001000,00001000,00001000,00000000
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5) 
Hardware failure display for the third unit (group 2) on channel 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 563 - 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM194 IO LINK I ALARM
IO LINK I
2008/11/18 12:00:00
 
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR(40XX-XXXX)
PC058 I/O LINK I
SLAVE LSI EXTERNAL ALARM 
-----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
CH1 / UNIT3(GROUP2) : I/O UNIT-A 
------------------------------------------------------ 
MA=03,FF,00,00,00,80 ME=00,00 GE=10,00 TOC=02 TTOC=05
RT=0,0,3,3,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G02 RC=03 RT=05 H=00001000,00001000,00001000,00000000
G03 RC=03 RT=05 H=00001000,00001000,00001000,00000000
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5) 
Connection failure display for the third safety I/O unit (group 2 and 3) on channel 1 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM194 IO LINK I ALARM
IO LINK I
2008/11/18 12:00:00
 
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR(40XX-XXXX)
PC054 I/O LINK I
ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY 
-----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
CH1 / UNIT3(GROUP2) : I/O UNIT-A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
------------------------------------------------------ 
MA=03,FF,00,00,00,80 ME=00,00 GE=10,00 TOC=02 TTOC=05
RT=0,0,3,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
G02 RC=03 RT=05 H=00001000,00001000,00001000,00000000
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5) 
 Power failure alarm display for the third unit (group 2) on channel 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 564 - 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM194 IO LINK I ALARM
IO LINK I
2008/11/18 12:00:00
 
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR(40XX-XXXX)
PC055 I/O LINK I
I/O LINK I SENDING DATA FAILURE 
 
-----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
CH1 / UNIT2(GROUP1) <-> UNIT3(GROUP2) 
UNIT2 : I/O UNIT-A
UNIT3 : ID=0xA5
------------------------------------------------------ 
MA=03,FF,00,00,00,80 ME=00,00 GE=10,00 TOC=02 TTOC=05


key: chroma:document
string_value:
RT=3,3,3,3,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0 
G00 RC=03 RT=05 H=00001000,00001000,00001000,00000000
G01 RC=04 RT=05 H=00011000,00011000,00011000,00011000
G02 RC=03 RT=05 H=00111000,00111000,00111000,00000000
G03 RC=03 RT=05 H=00110000,00110000,00110000,00000000
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5) 
Alarm display for communication between the second unit (group 1) and third unit (group 2) on channel 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 565 - 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM194 IO LINK I ALARM
IO LINK I
2008/11/18 12:00:00
 
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR(40XX-XXXX)
PC056 I/O LINK I
I/O LINK I DISCONNECTION 
-----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
CH1 / UNIT2(GROUP1) <-> UNIT3(GROUP2) 
UNIT2 : I/O UNIT-A
UNIT3 : ID=0xA5
------------------------------------------------------ 
MA=03,FF,00,00,00,80 ME=00,00 GE=10,00 TOC=02 TTOC=05
RT=3,3,3,3,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G00 RC=03 RT=05 H=00001000,00001000,00001000,00000000
G01 RC=04 RT=05 H=00011000,00011000,00011000,00011000
G02 RC=03 RT=05 H=00111000,00111000,00111000,00000000
G03 RC=03 RT=05 H=00110000,00110000,00110000,00000000
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5) 
Alarm display for a connection failure between the second unit (group 1) and third unit (group 2) on 
channel 1 
SERIES 0I DXXX
SYS_ALM194 IO LINK I ALARM
IO LINK I
2008/11/18 12:00:00
 
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR(40XX-XXXX)
PC057 I/O LINK I


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PC057 I/O LINK I
SAFETY I/O ALARM 
-----< ERROR POSITION >------------------------------- 
CH1 / UNIT2(GROUP1) : I/O UNIT-A 
------------------------------------------------------ 
MA=03,FF,00,00,00,80 ME=00,00 GE=10,00 TOC=02 TTOC=05
RT=0,3,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0 
DA=00,02,00,10 DOC=00,00,00,02 DIC=00,00,00,03
DST=00,00,01,00,03,03 
G01 RC=04 RT=05 H=00011000,00011000,00011000,00011000
 
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1 / 5)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 566 - 
10.26 LEDS ON UNITS SUPPORTING I/O LINK i
10.26.1 Meanings of LEDs on units supporting I/O Link i
The standard I/O Link i incorporates three LEDs, “LINK” (green), “ALM” (red), and “FUSE” (red) for 
each unit separately. These LEDs indicate the states of the units. 
The following table lists the ON/OFF states of the LEDs and their meanings. 
LED ON/OFF state ON and OFF duration 
Steadily OFF 
Steadily ON


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Steadily OFF 
Steadily ON 
Blink (1:1) ON = approx. 0.5 sec, OFF = approx. 0.5 sec 
Blink (3:1) ON = approx. 1.5 sec, OFF = approx. 0.5 sec 
Blink (1:3) ON = approx. 0.5 sec, OFF = approx. 1.5 sec 
Blink (1:1 at high speed) ON = approx. 0.25 sec, OFF = approx. 0.25 sec 
 LED “LINK” (green) 
The “LINK” (green) LED indicates the state of communication. The following table lists the meanings of 
LED states. 
Operation 
mode LED state Meaning Fault location and action 
Common 
OFF Power OFF 
ON


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Common 
OFF Power OFF 
ON 
Power ON 
(before communication 
start) 
Blink 
(1:1 at high 
speed) 
Communication at halt 
Communication is at halt because of an alarm. Identify the 
cause according to the states of the red LED stated below 
or information displayed on the CNC screen. 
I/O Link i 
Blink 
(1:1) 
Communication in 
progress 
Blink 
(3:1) 
Communication in 
progress 
(Dual check safety in 
use)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 567 - 
 LED「ALM」(red) 
The “ALM” (red) LED indicates an alarm in the unit of interest or a unit subsequent to it. The following 
table lists the meanings of LED states. 
Operation 
mode 
LED 
state Meaning Fault location and action 
Common OFF Normal state or power 
OFF 
I/O Link i 
ON Alarm It is likely that the hardware may be defective. Replace the 
unit. 
Blink 
(1:1) 
Broken wire between 
the unit of interest and 
a unit subsequent to it


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a unit subsequent to it 
Check for a defective cable or a poor cable connection 
between JD1A on the unit of interest and JD1B on a unit 
subsequent to that unit. Alternatively, it is likely that there may 
be noise. Check to see if there is noise around the cable. 
Blink 
(3:1) 
Power failure (including 
instantaneous power 
failure) in a unit 
subsequent to the unit 
of interest 
Identify and remove the cause of a power failure in a unit 
subsequent to the unit of interest. 
Blink


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Blink 
(1:3) Status alarm A status alarm, such as a DO ground fault, has occurred. 
Identify and remove the cause of the alarm. 
 LED「FUSE」(red) 
The “FUSE” (red) LED indicates whether there is a blown fuse. The following table lists the meanings of 
LED states. 
Operation 
mode LED state Meaning Fault location and action 
Common OFF Fuse normal or power 
OFF 
ON Blown fuse Replace the fuse.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 568 - 
10.26.2 Unit’s LED on I/O Link i
The following shows the ON/OFF state of the LED for each unit on I/O Link i and the state of the unit 
inferred from the ON/OFF state. The ON/OFF state of each LED is represented using the symbols in the 
following table. 
ALM LINK FUSE 
■ ■ ■
□ Steadily OFF 
■ Steadily ON 
☆ Blink (1:1) ON = approx. 0.5 sec, OFF = approx. 0.5 sec 
★ Blink (3:1) ON = approx. 1.5 sec, OFF = approx. 0.5 sec


key: chroma:document
string_value:
▲ Blink (1:3) ON = approx. 0.5 sec, OFF = approx. 1.5 sec 
◎ Blink (1:1 at high speed) ON = approx. 0.25 sec, OFF = approx. 0.25 sec 
(1) If all LEDs for each unit are steadily OFF: 
 No power is supplied to the units. 
(2) If “LINK” for each unit is steadily ON: 
 Power is being supplied to each unit but I/O Link i has not begun communication. 
0i -F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fifth unit 
(group 4) 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ■ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ■ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ■ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ■ □ 
ALM LINK 
□ ■ □ 
FUSE 
0i-F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4) 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ □ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ □ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ □ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ □ □ 
ALM LINK 
□ □ □ 
FUSE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 569 - 
(3) If “LINK” for each unit is blinking at an ON:OFF ratio of 1:1 or 3:1: 
 I/O Link i is normally communicating with the units. For a unit being used as dual check safety, 
“LINK” blinks at an ON:OFF ratio of 3:1. 
The state of a unit using 
dual check safety 
(4) If “ALM” for any unit is blinking at an ON:OFF ratio of 1:1: 
 It is likely that there may be a disconnected communication path (due to a defective communication


key: chroma:document
string_value:
cable or a poor cable connection) or an abnormal condition (due to noise) between the unit of 
interest and the unit immediately subsequent to that unit. 
 In this case, “LINK” for each unit previous to the point of disconnection blinks at 1:1 (high speed) 
and “LINK” for each unit subsequent to the point of disconnection is ON. 
 Check for a defective cable, a poor cable connection, and surrounding noise between JD1A on the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
unit for which “ALM” is blinking at 1:1 and JD1B on the unit immediately subsequent to that unit. 
(5) If “ALM” for any unit is blinking at an ON:OFF ratio of 3:1: 
(i) If all the LEDs for the unit immediately subsequent to the unit for which “ALM” is blinking at 
3:1 are OFF: 
 It is likely that there may be an abnormal voltage in the unit for which all the LEDs are OFF. 
 In this case, “LINK” for each unit previous to the unit having an abnormal voltage blinks at 1:1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(high speed) and “LINK” for each unit subsequent to that unit is ON. 
 For units for which all the LEDs are OFF, check that their voltage are normal. 
0i-F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4) 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
★ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ □ □ 
ALM LINK 
□ ■ □ 
FUSE 
Power failure
0i-F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4) 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
☆ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ■ □ 
ALM LINK 
□ ■ □ 
FUSE 
0i-F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4)
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ☆ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ☆ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ☆ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ☆ □ 
ALM LINK 
□ ☆ □ 
FUSE 
ALM LINK FUSE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. TROUBLESHOOTING B-64695EN/01
- 570 - 
(ii) If “LINK” for the unit immediately subsequent to the unit for which “ALM” is blinking at 3:1 
is ON: 
 It is likely that an instantaneous power failure may have occurred in the unit immediately 
subsequent to the unit for which “ALM” is blinking at 3:1. 
 In this case, “LINK” for each unit previous to the unit where the instantaneous power failure 
may have occurred blinks at 1:1 (high speed) and “LINK” for the unit where the instantaneous


key: chroma:document
string_value:
power failure may have occurred and each unit subsequent to that unit is ON. 
 For the unit immediately subsequent to the unit for which “ALM” is blinking at 3:1, check for 
any instantaneous power failure. 
(iii) If “FUSE” for the unit immediately subsequent to the unit for which “ALM” is blinking at 3:1 
is ON: 
 It is likely that a fuse may have blown in the unit for which “FUSE” is ON. 
 In this case, “LINK” for each unit previous to the unit having a blown fuse blinks at 1:1 (high


key: chroma:document
string_value:
speed) and “LINK” for each unit subsequent to that unit is ON. 
 Replace the fuse for the unit for which “FUSE” is ON. See Chapter "MAINTENANCE OF 
THE OTHER UNITS” for explanations about how to replace the fuse. 
0i-F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4) 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
★ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ □ ■ 
ALM LINK 
□ ■ □ 
FUSE 
Blown fuse 
0i-F


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FUSE 
Blown fuse 
0i-F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4) 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
★ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ■ □ 
ALM LINK 
□ ■ □ 
FUSE 
Instantaneous power 
Failure → Power recovery


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
- 571 - 
(6) If “LINK” is blinking at 1:1 (high speed) for all units: 
(i) If “ALM” for any unit is ON: 
 It is likely that there may be an alarm condition in the unit for which “ALM” is ON. Replace 
the unit of interest, because its hardware may be defective. 
(ii) If “ALM” is OFF for all units: 
It is likely that there may be an abnormal condition due to noise or the master may have an 
abnormal condition. Check also alarms displayed on the screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(7) If “ALM” for any unit is blinking at 1:3: 
 It is likely that there may be a status alarm for the unit for which “ALM” is blinking at 1:3. 
NOTE 
 Status alarms indicate a unit’s abnormal conditions, such as DO ground fault and 
DOCOM failure. For details, see Subsection “Items Common to Units 
Supporting I/O Link i”. 
0i-F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4) 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ☆ □


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ☆ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ☆ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
▲ ☆ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ☆ □ 
ALM LINK 
□ ☆ □ 
FUSE 
Status alarm 
0i-F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4) 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK 
□ ◎ □ 
FUSE 
0i-F 
(master) 
First unit 
(group 0) 
Second unit 
(group 1) 
Third unit 
(group 2) 
Fourth unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(group 2) 
Fourth unit 
(group 3) 
Fifth unit 
(group 4) 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
■ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK FUSE 
□ ◎ □ 
ALM LINK 
□ ◎ □ 
FUSE 
Alarm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 572 - 
11. MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 
11 MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 
This chapter contains the basic information about the preventive maintenance of motors, detectors, and 
amplifiers. 
11.1 LIST OF MANUALS RELATED TO MOTORS AND 
AMPLIFIERS 
Details of individual motors and amplifiers are described in the manuals listed in the table below. Before


key: chroma:document
string_value:
performing periodic inspection or any other maintenance work, consult with the machine tool builder and, 
if necessary, obtain the latest version of the corresponding manual shown in the list. The information 
about the specifications of each device, such as the weight and winding resistance value, is given in the 
relevant "DESCRIPTIONS" manual. 
Manual name Type of manual Specification 
number 
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi-B/αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65262EN


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi-B/βi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65302EN 
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi-Bseries 
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi-B series DESCRIPTIONS B-65452EN 
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi-B series DESCRIPTIONS B-65412EN 
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi-B series DESCRIPTIONS B-65422EN 
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi-B/αi series 
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi-B series 
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi-B series 
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi-B/βi series 
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi-B series 
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi-B series


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-65515EN 
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS series DESCRIPTIONS B-65332EN 
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS-B series DESCRIPTIONS B-65492EN 
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series DESCRIPTIONS B-65382EN 
FANUC BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR BiI-B series DESCRIPTIONS B-65462EN 
FANUC SYNCHROUNOUS BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR BiS series DESCRIPTIONS B-65342EN 
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi-B/αi series 
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi-B/βi series 
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS-B/Lis series


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FANUC DD MOTOR DiS-B/DiS series 
PARAMETER MANUAL B-65270EN 
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series 
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series 
BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi series 
PARAMETER MANUAL B-65280EN 
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi-B series I/O Link Option MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-65435EN 
FANUC SERVO GUIDE OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-65404EN 
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi/βis series SERVO TUNING 
PROCEDURE (BASIC) B-65264EN


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 573 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
11.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE OF MOTORS AND 
DETECTORS
11.2.1 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes on Preventive Maintenance of 
Motors and Detectors
This subsection contains the safety precautions for motor and detector preventive maintenance, which are 
classified into "warnings", "cautions", and "notes" according to their bearing on safety. Make sure that


key: chroma:document
string_value:
you understand and comply with these precautions when carrying out the maintenance work.
WARNING
• Make sure that you are safely dressed and have a safe working environment when 
performing preventive maintenance for a motor.
- Be dressed safely, e.g. by wearing gloves and safety shoes, to protect against injury due to an 
edge or protrusion and electric shock.
- Have the work done by more than one person, where possible, so that immediate action can be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
taken if an accident occurs when handling a motor.
- A motor is heavy. When moving it, use a crane or other appropriate equipment to protect 
against injury. For information about the weight of the motor, refer to its DESCRIPTIONS 
manual (shown earlier).
- Clothes or fingers can be caught in a rotating motor or come into contact with a moving part of 
it. Standing in the direction of motor rotation (direction of motion) can pose a risk of injury.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Before rotating a motor, check that there is no object that is thrown away by motor rotation.
• Be careful about electric shock, fire, and other accidents.
- Do not handle a motor with a wet hand.
- To prevent electric shock, make sure that no conductive object, such as a terminal, is exposed 
when the motor is powered on.
- Before touching a motor or any surrounding part, check that the power is shut off and take 
appropriate safety precautions.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- High voltage remains across power line terminals of a motor even after the power is shut off 
(for at least five minutes). Do not touch a motor in such a condition or connect it to other 
equipment.
- A loose or disconnected terminal, short-circuited terminals, or a terminal connected to the 
ground can cause overheating, spark, fire, or damage to the motor. Take appropriate 
precautions to prevent these accidents.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- When placed near any inflammable object or material, a motor can be ignited, catch fire, or 
explode. Avoid placing it near such object or material.
• Do not disassemble or modify a motor.
Motors such as linear motors, synchronous built-in servo motors, and synchronous built-in spindle
motors contain very strong magnets. If electronic medical apparatus comes near, these motors can 
cause the apparatus to malfunction, potentially putting the user's life in danger. Also, disassembling


key: chroma:document
string_value:
or modifying a motor can cause a failure, regardless of the type of motor. Do not disassemble or 
modify a motor in any way not specified by FANUC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 574 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Ensure that the specified cooling conditions are met.
If the specified cooling conditions are not met (the motor is insufficiently or excessively cooled), the 
motor can fail. Problems that can cause a motor failure, such as liquid piping clog, leakage, and fan 
motor trouble, should be eliminated through periodic inspection. Do not drive the motor when the 
cooling system is in an abnormal condition.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Do not change the system configuration.
Do not change the configuration of the system when it is running normally. Doing so can cause an 
accident or failure. If you disconnect a cable for maintenance or some other purpose, take an 
appropriate measure, such as putting a mark on it, to ensure you can restore the original state.
• Use the tapped holes of a motor only to move the motor.
Do not use the tapped holes of a motor to lift or move any other object along with the motor. Doing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
so can damage the motor. Depending on the type of motor, the place and direction in which the 
motor can be lifted may be predetermined. For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual of the 
motor (shown earlier).
• Do not touch a motor when it is running or immediately after it stops.
A motor may get hot when it is running. Do not touch the motor before it gets cool enough.
Otherwise, you may get burned.
NOTE
• Do not remove a nameplate from a motor.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The nameplate is used to identify the motor during maintenance work. If a nameplate comes off, be 
careful not to lose it.
• Do not step or sit on a motor, and avoid applying shock to a motor.
Any of these acts can deform or break the motor or affect its component, crippling the normal motor 
operation. Do not put a motor on top of another motor.
• Comply with the specified conditions when conducting an electric test (winding


key: chroma:document
string_value:
resistance test, insulation resistance test, etc.) for a motor or other device or 
supplying power.
- Conduct an electric test according to the specified method. Conducting such a test by any 
method that is not specified can damage the motor.
- Do not conduct a dielectric strength test or insulation test for a Pulsecoder or other detector, or 
do not apply a commercial power source voltage. Doing so can destroy the internal elements.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Perform preventive maintenance (inspection of the external appearance, 
measurement of winding resistance, insulation resistance, etc.) and cleaning on a 
regular basis.
To use a motor safely throughout its entire service life, perform preventive maintenance and 
cleaning on a regular basis. Be careful, however, because excessively severe inspection (dielectric 
strength test, etc.) can damage its windings. For information about winding resistance values, refer


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to the DESCRIPTIONS manual of the motor (its specification number is shown in this manual). 
Information about insulation resistance is given later in this manual.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 575 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
NOTE
• This manual is focused on the preventive maintenance work to be performed for 
a single FANUC motor or detector alone. The information contained herein may 
not apply depending on the type or configuration of the machine. When reading 
this manual, refer to the manual of the machine as well. If you have any 
questions or doubts, do not act on your own; please contact the machine tool 
builder or FANUC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
builder or FANUC.
• For detailed information about a motor, see the manual list shown earlier and, if 
necessary, obtain the latest version of the corresponding manual.
11.2.2 Preventive Maintenance of a Motor (Common to All Models)
This subsection describes the common preventive maintenance items to be handled regardless of the 
model of the motor. For the items specific to a particular motor model, see one of the subsequent 
subsections that pertains to that particular motor model.
CAUTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CAUTION
• The preventive maintenance method differs from machine to machine in many 
respects. Depending on the machine in use, it may be difficult for the user to 
perform periodic inspection or cleaning. If you are not sure about anything as to 
preventive maintenance, consult with the machine tool builder and ensure that 
you can perform periodic inspection and cleaning.
• The machine should be used within the scope of specification defined by the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
machine tool builder. Using the machine in any way that is outside the specified 
scope can reduce the motor's service life or cause a failure.
11.2.2.1 Main inspection items
The following table summarizes the main inspection items for a motor. If any of these items is found to 
be abnormal, stop the use of the machine immediately and fix the abnormal part by repairing or 
replacing it. At the same time, identify and remove the cause and take a measure to prevent its


key: chroma:document
string_value:
recurrence. If it is difficult to take a preventive measure or to prevent its recurrence, consult with the 
machine tool builder or FANUC.
Appearance of 
the motor
Crack or 
deformation
- Check the motor for any scar, crack, deformation, bulge, etc.
- If the interior of the motor is visible or there is interference with a 
peripheral component, it is imperative to replace the motor or the 
peripheral component.
- A light peel-off or scar of the surface may be repairable; consult with 
FANUC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FANUC.
Wet or dirty part - If you find any wet or dirty part, clean it immediately.
- A preventive measure is needed if the part in question remains wet 
continually due to cutting fluid or dew condensation.
Operating 
conditions
Temperature, 
humidity, etc.
- Comply with the operating conditions of the machine. For details of the 
operating conditions of a specific motor, refer to the corresponding 
DESCRIPTIONS manual. Generally, the ambient temperature should


key: chroma:document
string_value:
be 0°C to 40°C (or 30°C for a spindle unit) and dew condensation is not 
allowed. In a place subject to severe vibration, the components of the 
motor may be broken.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 576 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Connection 
state
Cable - Check for any cable sheath damage, exposed conductor, damaged 
conduit or cable bearing, abnormal bending, loose terminal, etc.
- If there is any trace of fluid flowing, the fluid may have entered the 
inside of the motor or connector. It is necessary to make a check and 
take a measure to prevent recurrence.
Connector/terminal - Check for any cracked, exposed, loose, or removed terminal or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
connector, etc.
- Fluid causes a failure; be sure to remove fluid.
- A scarred or damaged connector or terminal needs to be replaced. In 
the case of a resin molded motor, such as a linear motor, the motor 
needs to be replaced.
Operation of 
the motor
Noise/vibration - Check for any abnormal noise or vibration not only when the motor is 
running (the spindle is rotating) but also when it is stopped.
- Abnormal noise heard when the motor is rotating indicates an


key: chroma:document
string_value:
abnormality of the bearing or a failure inside the motor.
Movement - Check that the motor operates normally and smoothly.
- If the circuit breaker trips at the same time the motor starts to operate, 
it indicates abnormal motor windings.
Heat Check whether the motor does not overheat during the normal operation 
cycle.
Note: While the motor is running or immediately after it is stopped, the 
motor surface may become very hot. Instead of touching the motor directly


key: chroma:document
string_value:
by hand, use a thermolabel, surface thermometer, etc.
Electric 
characteristics 
of the motor
Winding resistance If the resistance value exceeds the specified range, the motor needs to be 
replaced.
Note: When conducting winding resistance measurement, disconnect the 
motor from the amplifier and measure the resistance at the power line or 
connector closest to the motor.
Insulation 
resistance
For the measuring method and judgment criteria, see the table that follows.
Cooling fan


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Cooling fan
(for a model 
with a fan 
motor)
Noise/vibration - Check that the fan blows air normally without causing abnormal noise 
or vibration.
- If abnormal noise is heard even when the motor is stopped, it indicates 
a fan motor failure.
Movement - If the power is on and if the fan does not operate or the fan blades 
cannot be moved even manually, or if the fan blades are rotating but no 
cooling wind is blown out, the fan motor may have cutting chips or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
sludge accumulated in it and needs to be cleaned.
- If the fan does not operate normally for any other reason, the fan motor 
needs to be replaced.
Forcible 
cooling unit
(when using an 
external 
cooling unit 
such as liquid 
cooling unit)
Dew condensation 
(over-cooling)
- Check that forcible cooling does not cause dew condensation on the 
motor surface. Dew condensation is likely particularly when the cooling 
unit continues to run after the machine is stopped. In that case, be sure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to make this check.
- Dew condensation or water drop on the motor surface can reduce the 
motor's service life. It is necessary to wipe it dry and take a measure to 
prevent recurrence.
Liquid 
leakage/clog
- Check the cooling pipe for leakage or clog. Do not drive the motor 
unless the leakage or clog is fixed.
- Liquid leakage from a spindle motor with a through hole indicates a 
failure of the coolant joint. In this case, the joint needs to be replaced.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- In the case of liquid leakage from a linear motor (coil slider), the linear 
motor (coil slider) needs to be replaced.
- If the motor gets wet due to liquid leakage or any other cause, it is 
necessary to clean and dry the motor and perform electric 
characteristic checks (winding resistance/insulation resistance).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 577 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Insulation resistance measurement
Insulation resistance can be measured by insulation leakage detection function built-in αi-B amplifier or 
separated insulation leakage detection module. And the following table shows the judgment criteria to be 
applied when measuring insulation resistance between winding and frame using a megohmmeter (500 
VDC).
Insulation resistance Judgment
100 Ω or higher Acceptable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
100 Ω or higher Acceptable
10 to 100 Ω The winding has begun deteriorating. There is no problem with the performance at 
present. Be sure to perform periodic inspection.
1 to 10 Ω The winding has considerably deteriorated. Special care is in need. Be sure to perform 
periodic inspection.
Lower than 1 Ω Unacceptable. Replace the motor.
If insulation resistance drops sharply during a short period of time or if the circuit breaker trips, the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
cutting fluid or other foreign matter may have entered the inside of the motor or cable. In that case, 
contact the machine tool builder or FANUC for instructions.
CAUTION
• The winding or insulation resistance measurement should be performed on the 
motor alone, with its power line disconnected.
Measuring insulation resistance with the motor connected to the amplifier may 
damage the amplifier.
• During insulation resistance measurement, applying voltage to the motor for a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
long time may further deteriorate the insulation of the motor. Therefore, the 
measurement of insulation resistance should be performed in a minimum 
amount of time where possible.
• When disconnecting the power line and other cables, take an appropriate 
measure, such as labeling, to ensure that they can be restored to their original 
state.
11.2.2.2 Periodic cleaning of a motor
Periodic cleaning is necessary to remove an accumulation of cutting chips or sludge that may eventually


key: chroma:document
string_value:
cause a failure. Also, leaving the cutting fluid or other chemical substance attached for a long time can 
reduce the motor's service life substantially. When forcible cooling is provided by a liquid or air cooling 
unit, check the unit for pipe clog, fan failure, etc. and perform cleaning periodically to ensure that the 
coolant flows smoothly and that the motor is cooled properly.
WARNING
Depending on the type of motor, the handling may involve a risk and require


key: chroma:document
string_value:
safety education in advance. Also, some machines are difficult for users to clean 
on their own. If you are to clean the motor, consult with the machine tool builder 
in advance with regard to the cleaning method, safety education, etc.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 578 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
11.2.2.3 Notes on motor cleaning
A motor is an electric product, which is incompatible with most kinds of fluid. When removing cutting 
chips, sludge, cutting fluid, etc. during cleaning, note the following.
Note on cleaning Measure
Do not sprinkle fluid.
Do not wash by 
submerging.
Do not sprinkle or spray detergent or any other fluid over the motor (including its


key: chroma:document
string_value:
peripheral components), or do not wash the motor by submerging it in such fluid. When 
cleaning the motor, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent so 
that the fluid does not enter the inside the motor.
Do not use solvent.
Solvent may damage the motor; do not use one. If the dirt is difficult to remove with 
neutral detergent, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of industrial alcohol (e.g.,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
IPA). Be careful, however, because rubbing with force or repeatedly may damage the 
coated or resin surface.
Do not leave the motor 
wet or moistened.
If the motor is wet or moistened after cleaning, dry it before supplying power and before 
performing electric tests. When drying the motor in an oven, make sure that the 
temperature is below 40°C and that hot air does not blow directly against the motor.
11.2.2.4 Notes on the cutting fluid (informational)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Depending on the type of cutting fluid used, the motor and amplifier may be affected greatly. Take due 
care because, even if you ensure that they do not come into direct contact with the fluid, a mist or 
atmosphere of the fluid can cause the problems described below.
Type of cutting fluid 
requiring care Expected problem
Cutting fluid containing 
highly active sulfur or 
chlorine
Some types of cutting fluid contain highly active sulfur or chlorine. If such cutting fluid


key: chroma:document
string_value:
enters the inside of the motor or amplifier, it causes copper, silver, and other kinds of 
metal to corrode, leading to a component failure.
Synthetic cutting fluid 
with high permeability
Some types of cutting fluid containing such substance as polyalkylene glycol have very 
high permeability. Such cutting fluid permeates into the inside of the motor, causing 
insulation deterioration or component failure.
Highly alkaline, 
water-soluble cutting 
fluid


key: chroma:document
string_value:
water-soluble cutting 
fluid
Some types of cutting fluid that enhance their alkaline property using such substance as 
alkanolamine remain highly alkaline - pH10 or higher - when diluted. If such cutting fluid 
is left attached for a long time, its chemical change will deteriorate the resin and other 
materials of the motor and amplifier.
Other types of cutting fluid not mentioned above may cause various unexpected problems. If any problem


key: chroma:document
string_value:
arises for which the cutting fluid is thought to be responsible, consult with the machine tool builder or 
FANUC.
11.2.3 Preventive Maintenance of a Linear Motor
The magnet plate of a linear motor contains very strong magnets. When performing the maintenance work, 
make sure all those engaged in the work fully understand the potential risks involved.
WARNING
• The FANUC linear motors use very strong magnets. Improper handling of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
motor is very dangerous and can lead to a serious accident. Particularly, a 
person wearing a pacemaker or other medical apparatus should stay away from 
the linear motor; otherwise, the apparatus may malfunction, potentially resulting 
in a life-threatening accident.
• Those who will come near or touch a linear motor for maintenance work should 
receive safety education in advance. For details, contact the machine tool builder 
or FANUC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 579 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
11.2.3.1 Appearance inspection of the linear motor (magnet plate)
Perform an appearance inspection as well during cleaning or other maintenance work. A crack, chip, 
deformation, or any other abnormality in appearance of the motor can lead to a serious failure in the 
not-so-distant future. If you find any such abnormality, be sure to report it to the machine tool builder. A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
scratch or other slight scar on the motor surface can also be a sign of future trouble and needs to be 
addressed with care. Some suggested appearance inspection items for the magnet plate are described 
below.
* For the coil slider (the side to which the power line is connected), see "Main inspection items" 
earlier in this manual.
Appearance of the magnet plate (which may have a stainless cover)
Appearance inspection item Measure
Crack or chip in the magnet plate resin


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Deformation or bulge of the magnet plate or 
softening of the resin
The magnet plate needs to be replaced. If unattended, it can cause 
trouble in the not-so-distant future. If the problem is extremely 
minor, consult with the machine tool builder or FANUC.
The magnet is exposed, or the resin or 
magnet is floating The magnet plate needs to be replaced urgently.
Scratch on the magnet plate
Foreign matter may have entered into the motor, or interference


key: chroma:document
string_value:
between parts is likely. It is necessary to eliminate the cause and 
take a measure to prevent recurrence.
Floating, bulging, or deformed stainless 
cover The cover or magnet plate needs to be replaced.
11.2.4 Maintenance of a Detector
CAUTION
• Detectors such as Pulsecoders are precision equipment. When handling a 
detector, avoid applying shock to it. Also, exercise care to prevent cutting 
powder, dust, cutting fluid, or other foreign matter from attaching to it.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Make sure that all connectors are connected properly and securely. A 
connection failure can cause an alarm or some other problem.
• If the detector and/or connectors are not installed securely, cutting fluid may 
enter the inside of the detector, making it necessary to replace the detector. In 
that case, contact the machine tool builder or FANUC.
NOTE
If you use a detector not manufactured by FANUC, contact the machine tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
builder or detector manufacturer for detailed information on the detector.
11.2.4.1 Alarms for built-in detectors (αi and βi Pulsecoders) and 
troubleshooting actions
These alarms concern built-in detectors that are connected directly to the control unit (CNC/servo 
amplifier).
Based on the alarm number and description, take an appropriate action as described in the following 
subsection, "Detailed troubleshooting methods".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 580 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Alarm No.: Alarm Description Possible cause Action
Detailed 
troubleshooting 
method
361: ABNORMAL 
PHASE DATA(INT)
- Communication 
error in the 
Pulsecoder
- ID data error
- Pulse coder failure
- Noise
Replace the 
Pulsecoder.
(3)
(4)
364: SOFT PHASE 
ALARM(INT) Position data alarm
- Noise
- Entry of cutting 
fluid
Check the effect 
of noise.
Replace the 
Pulsecoder.
(1)
(3)
365: BROKEN


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1)
(3)
365: BROKEN 
LED(INT) LED disconnection - Pulse coder failure Replace the 
Pulsecoder. (3)
366: PULSE MISS(INT) Small internal signal
amplitude
- Pulse coder failure Replace the 
Pulsecoder.
(3)
(4)
367: COUNT 
MISS(INT)
Position data count 
error
- Pulse coder failure
- Noise
Replace the 
Pulsecoder.
(3)
(4)
368: SERIAL DATA 
ERROR(INT)
Communication 
interruption
- Cable 
disconnection
- Pulse coder failure
- Noise
Check the cable.
Replace the 
Pulsecoder.
(2)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Replace the 
Pulsecoder.
(2)
(3)
(4)
369: DATA TRANS. 
ERROR(INT)
Communication data 
alarm - Noise Check the effect 
of noise. (1)
453: SPC SOFT 
DISCONNECT ALARM
Position - pole data 
error
- Pulse coder failure
- Entry of cutting 
fluid
Replace the 
Pulsecoder. (3)
11.2.4.2 Alarms for separate detectors and troubleshooting actions
These alarms concern separate detectors that are connected to the control unit via a separate detector 
interface unit (SDU).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
interface unit (SDU).
Based on the alarm number and description, take an appropriate action as described in the following 
subsection, "Detailed troubleshooting methods".
Alarm No.: Alarm Description Possible cause Action
Detailed 
troubleshooting 
method
380: BROKEN 
LED(EXT)
LED 
disconnection
- Detector failure Replace the detector. (4)
382: COUNT MISS(EXT) Position data 
count error
383: PULSE MISS(EXT) Small internal 
signal amplitude
384: SOFT PHASE 
ALARM(EXT)
Position data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ALARM(EXT)
Position data 
alarm
385: SERIAL DATA 
ERROR(EXT)
Communication 
interruption
- Cable 
disconnection
- Noise
- Detector failure
Check the cable.
Check the effect of 
noise.
Replace the detector.
(2)
(1)
(4)
386: DATA TRANS. 
ERROR(EXT)
Communication 
data alarm - Noise Check the effect of 
noise. (1)
381: ABNORMAL 
PHASE (EXT)
387: ABNORMAL 
ENCODER(EXT)
For details, contact the machine tool builder or detector manufacturer.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 581 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
11.2.4.3 Detailed troubleshooting methods
(1) Checking the effect of noise
Check the value on the diagnostics data No. 356 (for a built-in detector) or 357 (for a separate detector) of 
the CNC unit.
Normally, 0 is displayed. However, if the position data from the Pulsecoder becomes unstable due to 
noise or some other factor, this value is incremented. The value is cleared when the CNC unit is powered


key: chroma:document
string_value:
off. Immediately after the power is turned on, 0 is displayed.
(2) Checking the cable
Check whether the feedback cable is not disconnected and whether the connector is properly plugged.
(3) Replacing the Pulsecoder
(3)-1 Pulse coder replacement procedure
<1> Remove the four M4 hexagon socket head cap 
screws fastening the Pulsecoder. The M3 bolts 
fastening the Pulsecoder cover do not need to 
be loosed. (See the figure at right.)
<2> Remove the Pulsecoder and Oldham's


key: chroma:document
string_value:
coupling (see the following figure).
<3> Set the new Pulsecoder and Oldham's coupling on 
the motor. Adjust the direction of the mate 
Oldham's coupling to that of the Oldham's 
coupling so that the teeth are engaged.
Push in the Pulsecoder until the O ring fits in the 
joint between the motor and Pulsecoder. Take care 
so that the O ring of the Pulsecoder is not bitten.
A
ttach the Pulsecoder in such a direction that the 
power connector of the servo motor and the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
feedback cable of the Pulsecoder face the same 
direction or that the thermistor connection parts of 
the servo motor and Pulsecoder match each other 
(see the figure at left).
<4> Fastening the Pulsecoder with the four M4 hexagon socket head cap screws in the reverse order of 
removing the Pulsecoder (<1>). (Appropriate torque: 1.5 Nm)
Bolt fastening the Pulsecoder cover M3
× Do not loosen
○ Remove
Oldham's coupling
Mate Oldham's coupling
O ring
Adjust the connector direction


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 582 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(3)-2 Feedback cable plugging procedure
Plug in the feedback cable connector, as instructed in the 
procedure below, and check that the connector is securely 
connected.
<1> Check the plugging side and key direction.
Check that the plugging side is free of foreign matter, 
such as dirt and oil.
<2> Plug in the feedback cable connector.
Hold the connector, as shown in the figure at


key: chroma:document
string_value:
right. Plug in the connector until you hear a 
click.
<3> Check the connection condition.
1. Check that the arrow mark of the 
connector is at the center, as shown in 
the figure at right. If the arrow mark is 
not at the center, turn the coupling nut 
manually until the mark comes to the 
appropriate position.
2. Hold the connector by the same part as in <2>, and pull it lightly toward you to check that the 
connector does not come off. Do not pull the connector with force.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(4) If troubleshooting is difficult for the user
If the problem is difficult for the user to troubleshoot because it is due to a detector failure or noise, 
consult with the machine tool builder or FANUC.
11.2.4.4 Maintenance of the Pulsecoder of βiS-B/βiS servo motors 
(40 and 60)
Problems concerning the Pulsecoders of the motors listed in the table below require the maintenance 
(replacement) of the entire motor (it is not possible to maintain the Pulsecoder alone).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Motor model Motor specification Remark
βiS 0.2/5000 A06B-0111-Bcc3#dddd Frame size 40 βiS 0.3/5000 A06B-0112-Bcc3#dddd
βiS 0.4/5000 A06B-0114-Bcc3#dddd
Frame size 60
βiS 0.4/5000-B A06B-2114-Bcc3#dddd
βiS 0.5/6000 A06B-0115-Bcc3#dddd
βiS 0.5/6000-B A06B-2115-Bcc3#dddd
βiS 1/6000 A06B-0116-Bcc3#dddd
βiS 1/6000-B A06B-2116-Bcc3#dddd
(cc, dddd : Any)
Main key Coupling nut
Straight type Right angle type
Caution)
Do not hold the coupling nut.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 583 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
11.3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE OF SERVO AMPLIFIERS
11.3.1 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes on Preventive Maintenance of 
Servo Amplifiers
This subsection contains the safety precautions on preventive maintenance of a servo amplifier (a generic 
term to refer to the power supply, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, and other sub modules of a motor


key: chroma:document
string_value:
drive unit). These precautions are classified into "warnings", "cautions", and "notes" according to their 
bearing on safety. Make sure that you understand and comply with these precautions when carrying out 
the maintenance work.
WARNING
• Make sure that you are safely dressed and have a safe working environment when performing 
preventive maintenance for a servo amplifier.
- Be dressed safely, e.g. by wearing gloves and safety shoes, to protect against injury due to an


key: chroma:document
string_value:
edge or protrusion and electric shock.
- Have the work done by more than one person, where possible, so that immediate action can be 
taken if an accident occurs when handling a motor.
- A servo amplifier and AC reactor contain heavy components. Be careful when transporting 
them or mounting them on the power magnetic cabinet. Also be careful not to get your fingers 
caught between the power magnetics cabinet and servo amplifier.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Before turning on the power, check that the door of the power magnetics cabinet and all other 
doors.
- Ensure that the door of the power magnetics cabinet containing the servo amplifier, as well as
all other doors, are closed and locked except during maintenance work.
• When the need arises to open the door of the power magnetics cabinet, only a person trained in 
the maintenance of the corresponding machine or equipment should do the task after shutting


key: chroma:document
string_value:
off the power supply to the power magnetics cabinet by opening both the input circuit breaker 
of the power magnetics cabinet and the factory switch used to supply power to the cabinet.
• Be careful about electric shock, fire, and other accidents.
- If the machine must be operated with the door open for adjustment or some other purpose, the 
operator must keep his or her hands and tools well away from any dangerous voltages. Such


key: chroma:document
string_value:
work must be done only by a person trained in the maintenance of the machine or equipment.
- Ensure that the door of the power magnetics cabinet is locked so that the door cannot be opened 
by anyone, except service personnel or a qualified person trained in maintenance to prevent 
electric shock, when the servo amplifier is powered on.
- When the need arises for an operator to open the door of the power magnetics cabinet and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
perform an operation, ensure that the operator is sufficiently educated in safety or that a 
protective cover is added to prevent the operator from touching any dangerous part.
- The servo amplifier contains a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor in it and remains charged 
for a while after the power is shut off. Before touching the servo amplifier for maintenance or 
some other purpose, measure the residual voltage of the DC link connection using a tester and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
check that the red LED for indicating charging is in progress is not lit, in order to ensure safety.
- After wiring, be sure to close the servo amplifier cover.
- A loose screw or poor connector contact can cause a motor malfunction or overheating, 
connection to ground, or short-circuit. Be extremely careful with power supply lines, motor 
power lines, and DC link connections through which a large electric current flows, because a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
loose screw or poor connector contact may lead to a fire. Tighten screws and connectors using 
the specified screw tightening torque.
- The surfaces of the regenerative discharge unit and heat radiator may become very hot. Do not 
touch them directly by hand.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 584 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
• When operating the machine for the first time after preventive maintenance, check that the
machine operates as instructed.
- To check whether the machine operates as instructed, first specify a small value for the motor
and then increase the value gradually. If the motor operates abnormally, perform an emergency 
stop immediately.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
stop immediately.
- When pressing the emergency stop button, check that the motor stops immediately and that the 
power being supplied to the amplifier is shut off by the magnetic contactor.
• Notes on alarms
- If the machine stops due to an alarm, check the alarm number. Depending on the alarm issued, 
if the power is supplied without replacing the failed component, another component may be 
damaged, making it difficult to identify the original cause of the alarm.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Before resetting an alarm, ensure that the original cause of the alarm has been removed.
• If the motor causes any abnormal noise or vibration while operating, stop it immediately.
- Using the motor in spite of the abnormal noise or vibration may damage the servo amplifier.
 
• Do not disassemble or modify a servo amplifier.
Do not disassemble or modify a servo amplifier in any way not specified by FANUC; doing so can 
lead to a failure.
CAUTION
• Notes on servo amplifier replacement and wiring


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The work of servo amplifier replacement and wiring should be carried out by a person trained 
in the maintenance of the machine and equipment concerned.
- When replacing a servo amplifier, check that the combination of the amplifier and the motor is 
appropriate.
- Check that the servo amplifier is securely mounted on the power magnetics cabinet. If there is 
any clearance between the power magnetics cabinet and the surface on which the amplifier is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
mounted, dust entering the gap may hinder the normal operation of the servo amplifier.
- Ensure that the power supply lines, motor power lines, and signal lines are each connected to 
the correct terminal or connector.
- Unless otherwise instructed, do not unplug a connector and plug it back with the power on; 
doing so may cause the servo amplifier to fail.
- When mounting or unmounting the servo amplifier, exercise care not to get your fingers caught


key: chroma:document
string_value:
between the servo amplifier and power magnetics cabinet.
- Take care not to lose track of removed screws. Turning on the power with any lost screw left in 
the unit may damage the machine.
- Exercise care to prevent the power supply lines and motor power lines from being connected to 
the ground or being short-circuited.
- Protect the lines from any stress such as bending. Handle the line ends appropriately.
• Be careful about the handling of a servo amplifier.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Do not disassemble a servo amplifier. Doing so poses the risk of electric shock, because the 
capacitor may remain charged.
- Do not apply shock to a servo amplifier. Doing so may damage its components, potentially
causing the amplifier to malfunction.
- Do not apply an excessively large force to plastic parts. If a plastic section breaks, it may 
damage internal parts, thus hindering normal operation or leading to a risk of injury due to a 
broken section.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 585 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
• Be careful about the operating environment of a servo amplifier.
- Prevent conductive, combustible, or corrosive foreign matter, mist, or drops of water from
entering the inside of the unit. The entry of any such material may cause the unit to explode, 
break, malfunction, etc.
- Exercise care to prevent cutting fluid, oil mist, cutting chips, or other foreign matter from


key: chroma:document
string_value:
attaching to the radiator or fan motor exposed to the outside of the power magnetics cabinet. 
Otherwise, the servo amplifier may become unable to meet its specifications. The service lives 
of the fan motor and semiconductors can also be reduced.
• Clean the heat sink and fan motor on a regular basis.
- Replace the filter of the power magnetics cabinet on a regular basis.
- Before cleaning the heat sink, shut down the power and ensure that the temperature of the heat


key: chroma:document
string_value:
sink is as cool as the room temperature. The heat sink is very hot immediately after power 
shutdown, touching it may cause burn injury.
- When cleaning the heat sink by blowing air, be careful about dust scattering. Conductive dust 
attached to the servo amplifier or its peripheral equipment can lead to a failure.
NOTE
• Make sure that there is sufficient maintenance clearance around the doors of the machine and
equipment.
• Do not step or sit on the servo amplifier, or do not apply shock to it.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Do not remove a nameplate from a motor.
- The nameplate is necessary to identify the servo amplifier during maintenance work.
- If a nameplate comes off, be careful not to lose it.
NOTE
• This manual is focused on the preventive maintenance work to be performed for 
a FANUC servo amplifier. The information contained herein may not apply 
depending on the type or configuration of the machine. When reading this 
manual, refer to the manual of the machine as well. If you have any questions or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
doubts, do not act on your own; please contact the machine tool builder or 
FANUC.
• For detailed information about a servo amplifier, see the manual list shown 
earlier and, if necessary, obtain the latest version of the corresponding manual.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 586 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
11.3.2 Preventive Maintenance of a Servo Amplifier
To use a servo amplifier safely throughout its entire service life, perform daily and periodic inspections.
CAUTION
• The preventive maintenance method differs from machine to machine in many 
respects. Depending on the machine in use, it may be difficult for the user to 
perform periodic inspection or cleaning. If you are not sure about anything as to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
preventive maintenance, consult with the machine tool builder and ensure that 
you can perform periodic inspection and cleaning.
• The machine should be used within the scope of specification defined by the 
machine tool builder. Using the machine in any way that is outside the specified 
scope can reduce the servo amplifier's service life or cause a failure.
Inspection 
part Inspection item Inspection interval Judgment criterion Routine Periodic
Operating 
environment
Ambient 
temperature


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Ambient 
temperature
✓ Around the power magnetics cabinet: 0°C - 45°C
Inside the power magnetics cabinet: 0°C - 55°C
Humidity ✓ 90% or below RH (dew condensation not allowed)
Dust/oil mist ✓ There shall be no dust or oil mist attached near the 
servo amplifier.
Cooling air path ✓ The cooling fan shall be operating normally without 
the air flow being interrupted.
Abnormal 
vibration/noise
✓
- No abnormal noise or vibration shall be present 
that has not been experienced in the past.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Vibration near the servo amplifier shall be 0.5 G 
or less.
Supply voltage ✓ 200-V input type: Within 200 - 240 V
400-V input type: Within 400 - 480 V
Servo 
amplifier
General ✓ There shall be no abnormal noise or smell, and 
there shall be no dust or oil mist attached.
Screw ✓ There shall be no loose screw.
Fan motor (NOTE 1, 2) ✓
- There shall be no abnormal vibration or noise, 
and the fan blades shall be rotating normally.
- There shall be no dust or oil mist attached.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Connector ✓ There shall be no loose or broken connector.
Cable ✓ There shall be no sign of overheating or sheath 
deterioration (discoloration pr crack).
CNC Absolute (NOTE 2)
Pulse coder battery
✓
The machine operator's panel or screen shall not 
display the alarm indicating the battery voltage of 
the absolute Pulsecoder is low.
External 
equipment
Magnetic contactor ✓ The contactor shall not rattle or chatter.
Ground fault 
interrupter
✓ The interrupter shall be able to trip.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
AC reactor ✓ There shall be no hum.
NOTE
1 Fan motors are periodic-replacement parts. It is recommended to inspect fan 
motors on a routine basis and replace them in a preventive manner.
2 Fan motors and batteries are periodic-replacement parts. It is recommended to 
keep spare parts.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 587 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
11.3.3 Maintenance of a Servo Amplifier
11.3.3.1 Display of the servo amplifier operation status
The STATUS LEDs on the front of the servo amplifier indicate the operation status of the servo amplifier 
(whether it is operating normally, the type of alarm, etc.). Use these LEDs for maintenance, inspection, 
troubleshooting, etc.
CAUTION
A servo amplifier failure may arise from a combination of multiple causes, in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
which case it can be difficult to identify all those causes. Handling the failure in 
an improper way may worsen the problem. It is therefore important to analyze 
the failure status minutely and identify the true cause or causes of the failure. 
There may be cases in which the failure appears to have been fixed but later 
recurs or cause a more serious trouble. If you are not sure about the root cause 
of or corrective action for a failure, do not act on your own; please contact the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
machine tool builder or FANUC for instructions on proper action.
[αi-B series]
(1) Power supply
STATUS LED 
position
STATUS 
display Description
LED is off
The STATUS LED is off.
Control power has not been supplied, cable is faulty, or control power 
circuit is defective. 
Number
Lighting
For about 4.0 s after the control power supply is switched on, the power 
supply software series No. and the power supply software edition No. are 
indicated.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
indicated.
First 1 sec : The upper two digits of the power supply software
series No.
Second 1 sec : The lower two digits of the power supply software
series No.
Third 1sec : The upper two digits of the power supply software
edition No.
Fourth 1sec : The lower two digits of the power supply software
edition No.
 Example) Software series No. 9G00
Software edition 01.1
9 G → 0 0 → 0 1 → _ 0
－－
Blink Waiting for communication with servo amplifier and spindle amplifier.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 588 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
STATUS LED 
position
STATUS 
display Description
Blink
Software compatibility check is being conducted in the Power Supply, 
servo amplifier, or spindle amplifier.
Usually, this check processing is completed instantaneously and -- is 
displayed.
If continues to blink, one of the following connections may not be 
correct:
<1> Between the Power Supply, servo amplifier, and spindle 
amplifier
(cables CXA2A, CXA2B)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(cables CXA2A, CXA2B)
<2> Between the CNC and servo amplifier or spindle amplifier 
(FSSB connection) Double check the cabling.
－－
Lighting Communication with servo amplifier and spindle amplifier is completed.
00
Blink During pre-charging.
00 Ready status
Alarm LED
lighting
Number 01 -
Alarm status
Alarm LED
Is off.
Number 01 -
Warning status
(2) Servo amplifier
STATUS LED 
position
STATUS 
display Description
 
LED is off
The STATUS LED is off.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The STATUS LED is off.
Control power has not been supplied, cable is faulty, or control power 
circuit is defective.
Number
Lighting
The software series/version is displayed at 4seconds after the power is 
turned on.
 Example) In case of software series/version is 9H00/01.0
9 → H → 0 → 0 → 0 → 1 → . → 0
－
Blink Self-Check
－
Lighting SV is waiting for a ready signal
0
Blink Measuring isolation resistor
0
Lighting
Ready status
The servo motor is excited.
Number
1 -
Alarm status


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 589 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(3) Spindle amplifier
STATUS LED 
position
STATUS 
display Description
LED is off
The STATUS LED is off.
Control power has not been supplied, cable is faulty, or control power 
circuit is defective. 
Number / 
alphabet
Lighting
For about 3.0 s after the control power supply is switched on, the spindle 
software series No. and the spindle software edition No. are indicated.
First 1 sec : A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
First 1 sec : A
Second 1 sec : The lower two digits of the spindle software series No.
Third 1sec : The spindle software edition No.
 Example) A0: Software series No. 9DA0
04: Software edition D
A → A 0 → 0 4
－－
Blink
The CNC has not been switched on.
The machine is waiting for serial communication and parameter loading 
to end.
－－
Lighting
Parameter loading has ended.
The motor is not supplied with power.
00 The motor is supplied with power.
Alarm LED
lighting
Number 01 -
Alarm status


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Number 01 -
Alarm status
The SPM is not operable.
See Chapter, “ALARM NUMBERS AND BRIEF DESCRIPTIONS” of 
Part, “TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE αi-B AMPLIFIER” in 
(B-65515EN).
Error LED
lighting
Number 01 -
Warning status
Incorrect parameter setting or improper sequence.
[βi SV-B series]
 
(1) βiSV4-B, βiSV20-B (2) βiSV40-B, βiSV80-B, βiSV10HV-B, βiSV20HV-B, βiSV40HV-B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 590 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(3) βiSV20/20-B (4) βiSV40/40-B
STATUS LED Description
None of the LEDs is on. Control power has not been supplied, cable is faulty, or control power 
circuit is defective.
The ALM LED (yellow) is on. Alarm status
The alarm type is indicated by the character displayed.
The LINK LED (green) is on. Communication between CNC and servo amplifier is progressing 
normally.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 591 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
[βi SVSP-B series]
POWER
ERR
STATUS 1
ALM
STATUS 2
POWER ALM ERR STATUS1 Description
LED is off
The STATUS LED is off.
Control power has not been supplied, cable is faulty, or control power 
circuit is defective. For details, please refer to “(3) spindle amplifier”. 
lighting Number / 
alphabet
For about 3.0 s after the control power supply is switched on, the spindle


key: chroma:document
string_value:
software series No. and the spindle software edition No. are indicated.
First 1 sec : A
Second 1 sec : The lower two digits of the spindle software series No.
Third 1sec : The spindle software edition No.
 Example) A0: Software series No. 9DA0
04: Software edition D
A → A 0 → 0 4
lighting －－
Blink
The CNC has not been switched on.
The machine is waiting for serial communication and parameter loading to 
end.
lighting －－
Lighting
Parameter loading has ended.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter loading has ended.
The motor is not supplied with power.
lighting 00 The motor is supplied with power.
lighting lighti
ng
Number
01 -
Alarm status
The βi SVSP-B is not operable.
See Chapter, “ALARM NUMBERS AND BRIEF DESCRIPTIONS” of Part, 
“TROUBLESHOOTING FOR βiSVSP-B” in (B-65515EN).
lighting lighti
ng
Number
01 -
Warning status
 Incorrect parameter setting or improper sequence.
STATUS2 Description
LED is off
The STATUS LED is off.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The STATUS LED is off.
Control power has not been supplied, cable is faulty, or control power circuit is defective. For 
details, please refer to “(2) servo amplifier”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 592 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
STATUS2 Description
Number
Lighting
The software series/version is displayed at 4seconds after the power is turned on.
 Example) In case of software series/version is 9H00/01.0
9 → H → 0 → 0 → 0 → 1 → . → 0
－
Blink Self-Check
－
Lighting SV is waiting for a ready signal
0
Blink Measuring isolation resistor
0
Lighting
Ready status
The servo motor is excited.
Number
1 -
Alarm status


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 593 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
11.3.3.2 Replacement of a fan motor
[αi-B series]
(1) Replacement of Fan Units of 60 or 90 mm Width Units
(1) Hold the two handles of the internal cooling fan unit and pull up them upward. (Dismantling of the 
internal cooling fan unit is complete.)
(2) Unlock the cover of the DC link terminal block, open the cover, check that the DC link is discharged 
(that the LED is off), and dismantle the DC link short bar.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Insert the screwdriver from the opening beside the DC link terminal block, and loosen the lower 
screw (one place) of the heat sink cooling fan unit.
(4) Loosen the upper screws (one place in the 60 mm width unit and two places in the 90 mm width 
unit) of the radiator cooling fan unit.
(5) Pull out the radiator cooling fan unit toward front. (Dismantling of the radiator cooling fan unit is 
complete.)
(6) When mounting the fan unit, perform the procedure in reverse order.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Note: Replace the fan motor with the main power supply and control power supply (DC24V) turned OFF.
When mounting the internal cooling fan unit, the connecting position of the connector may get 
misaligned, making it difficult to mount the fan unit. In this case, mount the fan unit by pressing 
the handle on the back of the unit to the left.
Handle
Handle
(1) (2) (3)
Screw on the top (4) (5) Note
Check for discharge.
Screw on the bottom


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 594 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(2) Replacement of Fan Units of 150 or 300 mm Width Units
(1) Hold the two handles of the internal cooling fan unit and pull up them upward. (Dismantling of the 
internal cooling fan unit is complete.)
(2) Unlock the cover of the DC link terminal block, open the cover, check that the DC link is discharged 
(that the LED is off), and dismantle the DC link short bar.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Insert the screwdriver from the opening beside the DC link terminal block, and loosen the lower 
screw (one place) of the radiator cooling fan unit.
(4) Loosen the upper screw (one place) of the radiator cooling fan unit.
(5) Pull out the radiator cooling fan unit toward front. (Dismantling of the radiator cooling fan unit is 
complete.)
(6) When mounting the fan unit, perform the procedure in reverse order.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Note: Replace the fan motor with the main power supply and control power supply (DC24V) turned 
OFF.
Check for 
discharge.
Handle
Handle
(1) (2) (3)
Screw on the bottom
Screw on the top (4) (5)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 595 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(3) Dismantling the Fan Motor from the Internal Cooling Fan Unit
(1) Dismantle the connectors (one or two places) from the case. For details, see the figure below.
<1> Insert a 3 mm or less flat-blade screwdriver into the gap between the case and the connector.
<2> Tilt the flat-blade screwdriver in the direction of the arrow.
<3> Dismantle the connector in the direction of the arrow.
Flat-blade screwdriver
Tilt.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Flat-blade screwdriver
Tilt.
<1> <2> <3>
(2) Dismantle the fan motor from the case.
Internal cooling fan units for the 60 mm width unit (three types with different connectors)
Internal cooling fan unit for the 90 mm 
width unit
When replacing the fan motor, pay attention 
to its orientation (when the fan motor is 
mounted in an amplifier, its label is facing 
upward) as well as to the orientation of the 
connector.
Internal cooling fan unit for the 150 and 300 mm width unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 596 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(4) Dismantling the Fan Motor from the Radiator Cooling Fan Unit
(1) Dismantle the relay connector from the fan connector in the 150 or 300 mm width unit. For details, 
see the figure below. (The 60 and 90 mm width units do not have a relay connector.)
<1> Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the gap between the case and the connector.
<2> Tilt the flat-blade screwdriver in the direction of the arrow.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<3> Dismantle the connector in the direction of the arrow.
Flat-blade screwdriver
Tilt.
<1> <2> <3>
(2) Dismantle the two or four screws fastening the fan motor.
(3) Dismantle the two screws fastening the fan motor connector.
Connector fastening screws
Connector fastening 
screws
Fan motor fastening screws
Fan motor fastening screws Relay connector


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 597 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Radiator cooling fan units for the 60 mm width unit (two types with different connectors)
Radiator cooling fan unit for the 90 mm
width unit
Radiator cooling fan unit for the 150 and 300 mm width unit
When replacing the fan motor, pay attention to its 
orientation (when the fan motor is mounted in an amplifier, 
its label is facing upward) as well as to the orientation of the 
connector.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
connector.
(5) Ordering Numbers of Fan Units and Fan Motors for Maintenance
Usually, maintain the fan motor by itself. If the plastic cover for the fan mounting section is damaged, 
order the fan unit. A fan unit is a set of a fan motor and a cover for mounting it. (See Section, 
"REPLACEMENT OF A FAN MOTOR.")
- Power Supply
(1) αiPS-B
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
αiPS 3-B A06B-6200-C607 A90L-0001-0580#B - -


key: chroma:document
string_value:
αiPS 7.5-B A06B-6200-C607 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C601 A90L-0001-0575#A
αiPS 11-B
αiPS 15-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
αiPS 26-B
αiPS 30-B
αiPS 37-B
A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C604 A90L-0001-0577
αiPS 55-B A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C604
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0577
Two are used.
αiPS 11HV-B
αiPS 18HV-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
αiPS 30HV-B
αiPS 45HV-B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
αiPS 30HV-B
αiPS 45HV-B
αiPS 60HV-B
A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C604 A90L-0001-0577
αiPS 75HV-B
αiPS 100HV-B
A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C604
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0577
Two are used.
αiPS 125HV-B A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C605
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0578
Two are used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 598 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(2) αiPSs-B
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
αiPSs 15-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
αiPSs 37-B A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C605 A90L-0001-0578
αiPSs 18HV-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
αiPSs 45HV-B A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C605 A90L-0001-0578
αiPSs 75HV-B
αiPSs 100HV-B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
αiPSs 75HV-B
αiPSs 100HV-B
A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C605
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0578
Two are used.
- Servo amplifier
(1) 1-axis
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
αiSV 4-B
αiSV 20-B
αiSV 40-B
αiSV 80-B
A06B-6200-C606 A90L-0001-0580#A - -
αiSV 160-B A06B-6200-C608 A90L-0001-0580#C A06B-6200-C602 A90L-0001-0575#B
αiSV 360S-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576


key: chroma:document
string_value:
αiSV 360-B A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C605 A90L-0001-0578
αiSV 10HV-B
αiSV 20HV-B
αiSV 40HV-B
A06B-6200-C606 A90L-0001-0580#A - -
αiSV 80HV-B A06B-6200-C608 A90L-0001-0580#C A06B-6200-C602 A90L-0001-0575#B
αiSV 180HVS-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
αiSV 180HV-B A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C605 A90L-0001-0578
αiSV 360HV-B A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C604
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0577


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0577
Two are used.
αiSV 540HV-B A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C605
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0578
Two are used.
(2) 2-axis
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
αiSV 4/4-B
αiSV 4/20-B
αiSV 20/20-B
αiSV 20/40-B
A06B-6200-C606 A90L-0001-0580#A - -
αiSV 40/40-B
αiSV 40/80-B
αiSV 80/80-B
A06B-6200-C607 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C601 A90L-0001-0575#A
αiSV 80/160-B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
αiSV 80/160-B
αiSV 160/160-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
αiSV 10/10HV-B
αiSV 10/20HV-B A06B-6200-C606 A90L-0001-0580#A - -
αiSV 20/20HV-B
αiSV 20/40HV-B
αiSV 40/40HV-B
A06B-6200-C607 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C601 A90L-0001-0575#A
αiSV 40/80HV-B
αiSV 80/80HV-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 599 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(3) 3-axis
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
αiSV 4/4/4-B
αiSV 20/20/20-B
αiSV 20/20/40-B
A06B-6200-C606 A90L-0001-0580#A - -
αiSV 40/40/40-B A06B-6200-C608 A90L-0001-0580#C A06B-6200-C602 A90L-0001-0575#B
αiSV 80/80/80-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
αiSV 10/10/10HV-B
αiSV 10/10/20HV-B A06B-6200-C606 A90L-0001-0580#A - -


key: chroma:document
string_value:
αiSV 20/20/20HV-B A06B-6200-C608 A90L-0001-0580#C A06B-6200-C602 A90L-0001-0575#B
αiSV 40/40/40HV-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
- Spindle amplifier
In some αiSP-B series, the cooling fan to be used may be different before and after the upgrade.
Order the fan unit and fan motor that match the amplifier ordering number in the following table for 
maintenance. 
Model name/
amplifier ordering 
number
Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
αiSP 2.2-B
A06B-6220-H002#H600 A06B-6200-C606 A90L-0001-0580#A - -
A06B-6222-H002#H610 - - - -
αiSP 5.5-B
A06B-6220-H006#H600 A06B-6200-C607 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C601 A90L-0001-0575#A
A06B-6222-H006#H610 - - A06B-6200-C601 A90L-0001-0575#A
αiSP 11-B, αiSP 15-B
A06B-6220-H011#H600
A06B-6220-H015#H600
A06B-6222-H011#H610
A06B-6222-H015#H610
A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
αiSP 22-B, αiSP 26-B, αiSP 30-B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A06B-6220-H022#H600
A06B-6220-H026#H600
A06B-6220-H030#H600
A06B-6222-H022#H610
A06B-6222-H026#H610
A06B-6222-H030#H610
A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C604 A90L-0001-0577
αiSP 37-B
A06B-6220-H037#H600
A06B-6222-H037#H610 A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C605 A90L-0001-0578
αiSP 45-B
A06B-6220-H045#H600
A06B-6222-H045#H610
A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C604
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0577
Two are used.
αiSP 55-B
A06B-6220-H055#H600


key: chroma:document
string_value:
αiSP 55-B
A06B-6220-H055#H600
A06B-6222-H055#H610
A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C605
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0578
Two are used.
αiSP 5.5HV-B
A06B-6270-H006#H600 A06B-6200-C608 A90L-0001-0580#C A06B-6200-C602 A90L-0001-0575#B
A06B-6272-H006#H610 - - A06B-6200-C602 A90L-0001-0575#B
αiSP 11HV-B, αiSP 15HV-B
A06B-6270-H011#H600
A06B-6270-H015#H600 A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
A06B-6272-H011#H610


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 600 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Model name/
amplifier ordering 
number
Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
αiSP 22HV-B, αiSP 30HV-B
A06B-6270-H022#H600
A06B-6270-H030#H600
A06B-6272-H022#H610
A06B-6272-H030#H610
A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C604 A90L-0001-0577
αiSP 45HV-B, αiSP 60HV-B
A06B-6270-H045#H600
A06B-6272-H045#H610
A06B-6272-H060#H610


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A06B-6272-H060#H610
A06B-6200-C610 A90L-0001-0581 A06B-6200-C605 A90L-0001-0578
αiSP 75HV-B
A06B-6270-H075#H600
A06B-6272-H075#H610
A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C604
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0577
Two are used.
αiSP 100HV-B, αiSP 100HV(SiC)-B
A06B-6270-H100#H600
A06B-6272-H100#H610
A06B-6272-H100#H610#S
A06B-6200-C610
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0581
Two are used.
A06B-6200-C605
Two are used.
A90L-0001-0578
Two are used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A90L-0001-0578
Two are used.
- Servo and spindle multi-axis amplifier
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
αiSVP 
20/20/20-2.2-B A06B-6200-C607 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C601 A90L-0001-0575#A
αiSVP 
40/40/40-2.2-B A06B-6200-C608 A90L-0001-0580#C A06B-6200-C602 A90L-0001-0575#B
αiSVP 
20/20/20-5.5-B A06B-6200-C609 A90L-0001-0580#B A06B-6200-C603 A90L-0001-0576
αiSVP


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 601 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
[βiSV-B series]
(1) Dismantling the Fan Unit of βiSV4-B or βiSV20-B
<1> Pull out the fan connector upward.
<2> Push the front of the fan unit to disengage the lug.
<3> Disengage the rear of the fan unit.
<4> Lift the fan unit in a slant direction.
When replacing the fan motor, pay attention to 
its orientation and the place where the cable 
passes through.
Fan motor blow 
direction
Fan unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 602 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(2) Dismantling the Internal Cooling Fan Unit of βiSV40-B, βiSV80-B, 
βiSV10HV-B, βiSV20HV-B, βiSV40HV-B, or βiSV20/20-B
1 Hold the two handles of the fan unit and pull up them in the direction (the upward direction of the 
figure) of the arrow.
Holding the two handles on the fan unit, lift the 
fan unit in the direction of the arrow (toward the 
top in the figure).
When replacing the fan motor, pay attention


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to its orientation and the orientation of the 
connector.
Pay attention to 
the orientation of the 
connector key. Fan unit
Handles
White
Black
Red


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 603 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(3) Dismantling the Fan Unit of βiSV40/40-B
1 Hold the two handles of the fan unit and pull up them in the direction (the upward direction of the 
figure) of the arrow.
Holding the two handles on the fan unit, lift the 
fan unit in the direction of the arrow (toward the 
top in the figure). When replacing the fan motor, pay attention 
to its orientation and the orientation of the 
connector.
Fan unit
Handles


key: chroma:document
string_value:
connector.
Fan unit
Handles
Pay attention to 
the orientation of the 
connector key.
White
Black
Red


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 604 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(4) Dismantling the Radiator Cooling Fan Unit of βiSV80-B or βiSV40HV-B
1 Dismantle the four mounting screws on the sheet metal and pull out the fan unit.
Four M4 screws
Fan motor 
blow direction


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 605 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(5) Dismantling the Fan Motor from the Fan Unit (βiSV4-B, βiSV20-B)
(a) A06B-6134-K003
(1) Dismantle the fan motor from the case.
<1> Pull up the side of the fan motor (the side without the case stoppers) away from the case.
<2> While pulling up the fan motor, push it toward its center from the side where the case stoppers 
are located.
<2> Push
<1> Pull up away from the case.
Stopper


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Stopper
When replacing the fan motor, pay attention to its orientation (when the fan motor is mounted in an 
amplifier, its label is facing upward).
(b) A06B-6134-K005
(1) Dismantle the fan motor from the case.
<1> Pull one of the lugs on the case.
<2> While pulling the lug, dismantle the fan using a flat-blade screwdriver or some other tool.
<1> Pull the lug outward.
<2> Insert a flat-blade 
screwdriver or some other tool, 
and dismantle the fan.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and dismantle the fan.
When replacing the fan motor, pay attention to its orientation (when the fan motor is mounted in an 
amplifier, its label is facing upward).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 606 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(6) Dismantling the Fan Motor from the Fan Unit (βiSV40-B, βiSV80-B, 
βiSV10HV-B, βiSV20HV-B, βiSV40HV-B, βiSV20/20-B)
(1) Remove the connector from the case.
<1> Insert a flat-blade screwdriver or some other tool between the case and the connector.
<2> Tilt the inserted screwdriver or tool.
<2> Dismantle by tilting the 
screwdriver or tool.
<1> Insert a flat-blade screwdriver or 
some other tool.
Connector


key: chroma:document
string_value:
some other tool.
Connector
(2) Pull the lugs on the case outwardly, and dismantle the fan motor.
Pull outward.
When replacing the fan motor, pay attention to its orientation (when the fan motor is mounted in an 
amplifier, its label is facing upward) as well as to the orientation of the connector.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 607 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(7) Dismantling the Fan Motor from the Fan Unit (βiSV40/40-B)
(1) Dismantle the connector from the case.
<1> Insert a flat-blade screwdriver or some other tool between the case and the connector.
<2> Tilt the inserted screwdriver or tool.
Connector
<1> Insert a flat-blade screwdriver 
or some other tool.
<2> Dismantle by tilting the 
screwdriver or tool.
(2) Dismantle the two screws fastening the fan motor.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fan motor fastening screws
Finger guard
Duct
Fan motor + connector
Case
When replacing the fan motor, pay attention to its orientation (when the fan motor is mounted in an 
amplifier, its label is facing upward), the orientation of the connector, and the orientation of the duct 
(its turned edge is facing the opposite direction of the connector).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 608 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(8) Specifications of Fan Units for Maintenance
(1) 1-axis
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
βiSV4-B
βiSV20-B
A06B-6134-K003
(Sheet metal type)
A06B-6134-K005
(Resin type)
A90L-0001-0423#50 - -
βiSV40-B A06B-6110-C605 A90L-0001-0510 - -
βiSV80-B A06B-6110-C605 A90L-0001-0510 A06B-6134-K002 A90L-0001-0445#B
βiSV10HV-B
βiSV20HV-B A06B-6110-C605 A90L-0001-0510 - -


key: chroma:document
string_value:
βiSV40HV-B A06B-6110-C605 A90L-0001-0510 A06B-6134-K002 A90L-0001-0445#B
(2) 2-axis
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
βiSV20/20-B
(A06B-6166-H201) A06B-6110-C605 A90L-0001-0510 - -
βiSV20/20-B
(A06B-6166-H201#A) - - - -
βiSV40/40-B A06B-6110-C641 A90L-0001-0569 - -


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 609 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
[βiSVSP-B series]
(1) Replacement of the Fan Unit
(a) 260mm width model
(1) Unlock the cover of the DC link terminal block, open the cover, check that the DC link is discharged 
(that the LED is off), and dismantle the DC link short bar.
(2) Insert the screwdriver from the opening beside the DC link terminal block, and loosen the lower 
screws (three places) of the fan unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Loosen the upper screws (three places) of the fan unit.
(4) Open the cover of the DC link terminal block, and pull out the fan unit toward front.
(5) When mounting the fan unit, perform the procedure in reverse order.
Check for 
discharge.
(1) (2)
Screws on the top (3 locations) (3) (4)
Screw holes on the bottom (3 locations)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 610 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(b) 180mm width model
(1) Unlock the cover of the DC link terminal block, open the cover, check that the DC link is discharged 
(that the LED is off), and dismantle the DC link short bar.
(2) Insert the screwdriver from the opening beside the DC link terminal block, and loosen the lower 
screws (two places) of the fan unit.
(3) Loosen the upper screws (two places) of the fan unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(4) Open the cover of the DC link terminal block, and pull out the fan unit toward front.
(5) When mounting the fan unit, perform the procedure in reverse order.
Check for 
discharge.
(1) (2)
Screws on the top (2 locations) (3) (4)
Screw holes on the bottom (2 locations)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 611 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(2) Dismantling the Fan Motor from the Fan Unit
(a) 260mm width model
(1) Dismantle the relay connector from the fan connector. For details, see the figure below.
(2) Dismantle the two or four screws fastening the fan motor. (A screwdriver whose shaft diameter is φ4 
mm or less is needed.)
(3) Dismantle the two screws fastening the fan motor connector.
Connector fastening 
screws
Fan motor fastening screws Relay connector


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Connector fastening 
screws
Relay connector Fan motor fastening screws
With a single fan motor
(View from the bottom of the 
amplifier)
With two fan motors
(View from the bottom of the 
amplifier)
(b) 180mm width model
(1) Dismantle the relay connector from the fan connector. For details, see the figure below.
(2) Dismantle the two screws fastening the fan motor. (A screwdriver whose shaft diameter is φ4 mm or 
less is needed.)
(3) Dismantle the two screws fastening the fan motor connector.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Connector fastening screws
Relay connector Fan motor fastening screws
View from the bottom of the amplifier


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 612 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(3) Specifications of Fan Units and Fan Motors for Maintenance
(a) 260mm width model
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
βiSVSP20/20-7.5-B
βiSVSP20/20-11-B
βiSVSP40/40-15-B
βiSVSP20/20/40-7.5-B
βiSVSP20/20/40-11-B
βiSVSP40/40/40-11-B
βiSVSP40/40/40-15-B
βiSVSP40/40/80-15-B
- - A06B-6320-C601 A90L-0001-0598#A
βiSVSP40/40-18-B
βiSVSP80/80-18-B
βiSVSP40/40-18 HV-B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
βiSVSP40/40-18 HV-B
βiSVSP40/40/80-18-B
βiSVSP80/80/80-18-B
βiSVSP40/40/40-18 HV-B
- - A06B-6320-C602 A90L-0001-0598#B
(b) 180mm width model
Model name Internal cooling fan Radiator cooling fan
Fan unit Fan motor Fan unit Fan motor
βiSVSP20/20-7.5-B
βiSVSP20/20-11-B
βiSVSP10/10-11 HV-B
βiSVSP20/20/40-7.5-B
βiSVSP20/20/40-11-B
βiSVSP40/40/40-11-B
βiSVSP20/20/20-11 HV-B
- - A06B-6321-C601 A90L-0001-0598#A
11.3.3.3 Replacement of fuses on printed-circuit boards
[αi-B series]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[αi-B series]
In the αi-B series, a printed-circuit board can be removed and inserted from the front of the servo 
amplifier.
The printed-circuit board removal/insertion procedure is common to the PS, SV, and SP.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 613 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
NOTE
1. When the fuse is blowed, the cause by the power supply short circuit of other 
apparatus
(sensor etc.) connected to servo amplifier can be considered.
Please exchange the fuse after a check whether other apparatus is normal.
If the cause is not removed, there is a possibility that the fuse will be blowed 
again.
2. Please use the fuse supplied from FANUC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3. Please check the rating mark on the PCB and seal of the fuse to prevent 
mistakes.
4. Reverse connection of 0V and 24V of the connector(CXA2D) for the external 
DC24V or the connector(CXA2A/B) for the communication between amplifiers 
make the fuse blow.
[Countermeasure]
1. Replace the fuse.
2. Change to the correct connection.
To insert the printed-circuit board, reverse the above procedure.
Ensure that the upper and lower hooks snap into the housing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the printed-circuit board is not inserted completely, the housing remains lifted. Pull out the 
printed-circuit board and insert it again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 614 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(1) Power supply
There is one fuse on the printed-circuit board for αiPS-B.
Symbol Ordering number Rating
FU1 A60L-0001-0290#LM32C 3.2A/48V
Printed circuit board
FU1（3.2A）
(Rating indicated in white)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 615 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(2) Servo amplifier
There is one fuse on the printed-circuit board for αiSV-B.
Symbol Ordering number Rating
FU1 A60L-0001-0290#LM32C 3.2A/48V
(1) 60/90mm width servo amplifier
Printed circuit board
FU1（3.2A）
(Rating indicated in white)
 
(3) Spindle amplifier
There is one fuse on the printed-circuit board for αiSP-B.
Symbol Ordering number Rating
F1 A60L-0001-0290#LM32C 3.2A/48V
Printed circuit board
F1 (3.2A)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 616 -
11.MOTOR/DETECTOR/AMPLIFIER 
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(4) Servo/Spindle multi-axis model
There is one fuse on the printed-circuit board for αiSVP-B.
Symbol Ordering number Rating
F1 A60L-0001-0290#LM32C 3.2A/48V
Printed circuit board
F1 (3.2A)
(Rating indicated in white)
[βiSV-B series]
In the βi-B series, a printed-circuit board can be removed and inserted from the front of the servo 
amplifier.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
amplifier.
The printed-circuit board removal/insertion procedure is common to αi-B series.
NOTE
1. When the fuse is blowed, the cause by the power supply short circuit of other 
apparatus
(sensor etc.) connected to servo amplifier can be considered.
Please exchange the fuse after a check whether other apparatus is normal.
If the cause is not removed, there is a possibility that the fuse will be blowed 
again.
2. Please use the fuse supplied from FANUC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3. Please check the rating mark on the PCB and seal of the fuse to prevent 
mistakes.
4. Reverse connection of 0V and 24V of the connector(CXA19A/B) for the external 
DC24V make the fuse blow.
[Countermeasure]
1. Replace the fuse.
2. Change to the correct connection.


